1 #LyX 2.2 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
8 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
10 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
11 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
12 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
13 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
14 % the documentation team
15 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
17 \usepackage{ifpdf} % part of the hyperref bundle
18 \ifpdf % if pdflatex is used
20 % set fonts for nicer pdf view
21 \IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\usepackage{lmodern}}{}
23 \fi % end if pdflatex is used
25 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
26 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
28 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
29 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
30 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
31 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
33 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
37 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
38 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
40 % for customized page headers/footers
41 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
43 % change header rule width
44 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
46 % used to have extra space in table cells
47 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
48 {\usepackage{array}}{}
49 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
51 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
52 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
53 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
55 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
57 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
58 \use_default_options false
63 \maintain_unincluded_children false
65 \language_package default
70 \font_typewriter default
72 \font_default_family default
73 \use_non_tex_fonts false
79 \default_output_format default
81 \bibtex_command bibtex
82 \index_command default
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 0
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 0
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 0
110 \use_package stmaryrd 0
111 \use_package undertilde 0
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
121 \notefontcolor #0000ff
138 \paragraph_separation indent
139 \paragraph_indentation default
140 \quotes_language english
143 \paperpagestyle default
144 \tracking_changes false
145 \output_changes false
159 by the \SpecialChar LyX
164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
166 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
167 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
168 Documentation mailing list:
169 \begin_inset CommandInset href
171 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
182 \begin_inset Newline newline
186 \begin_inset Newline newline
190 \begin_inset Note Note
193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
194 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
195 \begin_inset Newline newline
200 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
201 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
209 \begin_layout Standard
210 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
211 LatexCommand tableofcontents
218 \begin_layout Chapter
222 \begin_layout Section
223 What is \SpecialChar LyX
227 \begin_layout Standard
229 is a document preparation system.
230 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
231 scripts, publishable books, business
232 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
233 It is unlike most other
234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
241 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
243 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
256 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
259 pt type, left justified, 5
260 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
269 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
273 \begin_layout Standard
274 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
279 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
283 \begin_layout Standard
288 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
289 's philosophy: most importantly,
290 the format of all of the manuals.
291 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
292 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
298 manual describes that, too.
301 \begin_layout Section
306 \begin_layout Standard
307 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
308 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
310 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
311 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
315 \begin_layout Standard
316 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
317 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
318 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
320 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
321 only a vertical scrollbar.
322 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
323 The first case is large images.
324 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
325 image and use the option
336 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
339 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
340 this doesn't work for equations yet.
343 \begin_layout Standard
344 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
345 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
351 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
353 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
360 \begin_layout Section
364 \begin_layout Standard
365 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
367 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
369 Just select the manual you want to read from the
376 \begin_layout Section
377 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
379 \begin_inset CommandInset label
381 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
388 \begin_layout Standard
389 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
390 can be configured via the menu
392 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
396 \begin_inset Index idx
399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
406 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
408 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
409 packages are available.
410 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
412 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
414 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
415 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
419 \begin_inset space \space{}
422 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
423 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
425 To force \SpecialChar LyX
426 to re-inspect your system, you should use
428 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
432 \begin_inset Index idx
435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
436 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
442 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
443 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
446 \begin_layout Section
449 \begin_inset CommandInset label
451 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
458 \begin_layout Standard
459 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
460 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
461 installed, but you will not be
462 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
463 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
464 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
465 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
466 document can always be output as plain text
470 \begin_layout Standard
471 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
472 or DocBook classes or packages.
473 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
474 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
477 \begin_layout Standard
478 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
479 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
480 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
483 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
491 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
492 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
495 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
499 \begin_inset Note Note
502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
503 The two braces in the \SpecialChar TeX
504 Code box prevent that the term
505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
513 from being printed with sub- and superscript letters.
514 More about \SpecialChar TeX
515 Code is described in section
520 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
522 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
526 , the printout of proper names like \SpecialChar LaTeX
527 is explained in section
532 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
534 reference "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
544 \begin_inset Index idx
547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
548 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
554 See section 5.1 of the
558 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
562 \begin_layout Chapter
563 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
567 \begin_layout Section
568 Basic File Operations
569 \begin_inset Index idx
572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
581 \begin_layout Standard
586 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
587 in addition to some more advanced operations:
590 \begin_layout Itemize
612 \begin_layout Itemize
628 arg "buffer-new-template"
634 \begin_layout Itemize
656 \begin_layout Itemize
666 \begin_layout Itemize
680 \begin_layout Itemize
702 \begin_layout Itemize
714 arg "buffer-write-as"
720 \begin_layout Itemize
734 \begin_layout Itemize
748 \begin_layout Standard
749 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
750 a few minor differences.
753 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
764 command lists the available templates.
765 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
766 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
767 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
769 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
773 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
775 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
782 \begin_layout Standard
783 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
804 \begin_inset Quotes erd
808 \begin_inset Quotes eld
812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
815 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
816 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
817 is just that — a big, blank space.
825 \begin_layout Standard
846 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
851 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
854 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
872 will reload the document from disk.
873 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
874 and want to restore it to the last save.
883 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
884 them as your changes.
887 \begin_layout Section
888 Basic Editing Features
889 \begin_inset Index idx
892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
899 \begin_inset CommandInset label
901 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
908 \begin_layout Standard
909 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
910 can perform cut and paste operations
911 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
912 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
913 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
914 editing features and how to access
916 We will start with cut and paste.
919 \begin_layout Standard
920 As you might expect, the
924 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
925 various other editing features.
926 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
930 \begin_layout Itemize
936 \begin_inset Index idx
939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
968 \begin_layout Itemize
974 \begin_inset Index idx
977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1006 \begin_layout Itemize
1012 \begin_inset Index idx
1015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1040 \begin_layout Itemize
1044 \begin_inset space ~
1050 \begin_layout Itemize
1054 \begin_inset space ~
1060 \begin_layout Itemize
1064 \begin_inset space ~
1068 \begin_inset space ~
1074 \begin_inset Index idx
1077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1086 \begin_inset Index idx
1089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1104 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1114 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1120 \begin_layout Standard
1121 The first three are self-explanatory.
1122 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1123 and other programs by
1144 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1145 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1150 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1151 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1152 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1153 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1154 into individual cells.
1158 \begin_inset space ~
1163 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1164 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1168 \begin_layout Standard
1172 \begin_inset space ~
1177 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1179 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1181 \begin_inset space ~
1188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1194 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1195 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1196 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1198 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1202 \begin_inset space \space{}
1205 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1206 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1209 \begin_inset space ~
1212 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1214 \begin_inset space ~
1218 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1222 \begin_inset space ~
1231 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1232 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1234 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1238 \begin_inset space ~
1243 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1244 start a new paragraph.
1245 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1246 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1251 \begin_inset space ~
1254 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1256 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1260 \begin_inset space ~
1268 \begin_inset space ~
1271 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1274 paste from the primary selection.
1275 This is normally the currently selected text.
1278 \begin_layout Standard
1281 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1283 \begin_inset space ~
1287 \begin_inset space ~
1295 \begin_inset space ~
1299 \begin_inset space ~
1305 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1311 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1314 \begin_inset space ~
1323 \begin_inset space ~
1328 button to skip the current word.
1332 \begin_inset space ~
1337 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1341 \begin_inset space ~
1346 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1348 If the toggle is set, searching for
1349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1360 will not match the word
1361 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1369 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1375 Match whole words only
1377 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1378 to only find complete words, e.
1379 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1391 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1395 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1403 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1408 offers also an advanced
1411 \begin_inset space ~
1415 \begin_inset space ~
1420 feature that is described in sec.
1421 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1425 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1427 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1434 \begin_layout Standard
1435 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1436 \begin_inset space \space{}
1440 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1448 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1450 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1455 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1462 \begin_layout Standard
1466 arg "inset-select-all"
1469 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1470 When the cursor is inside an inset
1473 arg "inset-select-all"
1476 selects the content of the inset.
1480 arg "inset-select-all"
1483 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1488 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1491 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1495 \begin_layout Section
1497 \begin_inset Index idx
1500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1507 \begin_inset Index idx
1510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1517 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1519 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1526 \begin_layout Standard
1527 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1529 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1532 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1535 or the toolbar button
1541 to undo some mistake.
1542 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1544 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1547 or the toolbar button
1554 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1561 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1562 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1565 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1568 \begin_layout Standard
1569 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1578 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1579 This is a consequence of the 100
1580 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1583 step undo limit mentioned above.
1586 \begin_layout Standard
1595 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1597 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1601 \begin_layout Section
1603 \begin_inset Index idx
1606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1615 \begin_layout Standard
1616 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1619 \begin_layout Enumerate
1624 \begin_layout Itemize
1629 once anywhere in the edit window.
1630 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1634 \begin_layout Enumerate
1639 \begin_layout Itemize
1646 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1649 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1652 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1653 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1656 \begin_layout Itemize
1657 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1660 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1667 \begin_layout Enumerate
1668 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1672 \begin_layout Standard
1673 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1674 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1678 \begin_layout Section
1680 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1682 name "sec:Navigating"
1687 \begin_inset Index idx
1690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1699 \begin_layout Standard
1701 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1704 \begin_layout Itemize
1709 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1710 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1713 \begin_layout Itemize
1714 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1716 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1718 \begin_inset space ~
1723 or by the toolbar button
1726 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1732 \begin_layout Itemize
1733 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1735 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1738 and use the same menu to return to them.
1739 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1742 \begin_layout Standard
1746 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1751 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1752 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1754 \begin_inset space ~
1759 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1760 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1761 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1762 your last editing position.
1765 \begin_layout Standard
1770 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1774 \begin_layout Subsection
1776 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1778 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1785 \begin_layout Standard
1786 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1787 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1788 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1790 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1794 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1796 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1800 ), or notes, or citations (see sec.
1801 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1805 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1807 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1812 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1816 \begin_layout Standard
1817 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1818 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1819 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1820 dialog and to modify the citation.
1823 \begin_layout Standard
1824 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1826 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1827 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1835 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1838 \begin_layout Standard
1839 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1840 you further to control the display.
1845 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1846 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1852 option keeps it in the current view state.
1853 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1854 \begin_inset space ~
1857 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1858 \begin_inset space ~
1861 3, the subsections of sections
1862 \begin_inset space ~
1865 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1870 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1871 \begin_inset space ~
1875 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1885 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1888 \begin_layout Standard
1895 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1896 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1910 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1911 So, for example, you can move section
1912 \begin_inset space ~
1916 \begin_inset space ~
1919 2.4 or after section
1920 \begin_inset space ~
1925 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1938 (or the corresponding key bindings
1946 ) you can change the level of sections.
1947 So you can for example make section
1948 \begin_inset space ~
1952 \begin_inset space ~
1956 \begin_inset space ~
1962 \begin_layout Section
1963 Input/Word Completion
1964 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1966 name "sec:Input-Completion"
1971 \begin_inset Index idx
1974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1981 \begin_inset Index idx
1984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2015 \begin_layout Standard
2017 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2019 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2020 is used to propose completions.
2023 \begin_layout Standard
2024 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2027 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2032 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2039 \begin_inset space ~
2043 \begin_inset space ~
2048 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2052 \begin_inset space ~
2057 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2058 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2062 \begin_inset space ~
2068 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2069 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2070 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2071 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2074 \begin_layout Standard
2076 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2077 completions available.
2082 key to accept a proposed completion.
2083 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2084 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2085 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2092 \begin_layout Standard
2093 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2094 ing options for text.
2095 The special math option
2099 enables characters to be composed.
2100 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2101 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2104 , you can then input the characters
2105 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2113 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2116 to a formula to get it.
2117 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2118 of the math toolbar.
2119 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2123 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2124 's installation folder.
2125 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2134 \begin_layout Section
2136 \begin_inset Index idx
2139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2146 \begin_inset Index idx
2149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2178 \begin_inset Index idx
2181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2212 \begin_layout Standard
2213 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2227 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2230 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2234 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in sec.
2235 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2239 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2241 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2248 \begin_layout Standard
2252 \begin_inset space ~
2260 \begin_inset space ~
2281 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2285 \begin_layout Labeling
2286 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2290 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2291 LatexCommand nomenclature
2293 description "Tabulator key"
2299 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2301 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2302 \begin_inset space ~
2306 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2308 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2313 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2315 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2319 , especially section
2320 \begin_inset space ~
2324 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2326 reference "subsec:Lists"
2332 If you are still confused, look in the
2337 \begin_inset Newline newline
2345 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2346 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2350 \begin_layout Labeling
2351 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2355 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2356 LatexCommand nomenclature
2358 description "Escape key"
2365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2369 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2372 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2373 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2376 \begin_layout Labeling
2377 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2383 \begin_inset space ~
2387 \begin_inset space ~
2394 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2395 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2399 \begin_layout Standard
2400 There are three modifier keys:
2403 \begin_layout Labeling
2404 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2410 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2422 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2423 LatexCommand nomenclature
2425 description "Control key"
2429 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2430 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2434 \begin_layout Itemize
2443 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2446 \begin_layout Itemize
2455 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2458 \begin_layout Itemize
2467 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2471 \begin_layout Labeling
2472 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2490 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2491 LatexCommand nomenclature
2493 description "Shift key"
2497 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2498 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2501 \begin_layout Labeling
2502 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2516 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2520 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2521 LatexCommand nomenclature
2523 description "Alt or Meta key"
2527 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2528 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2529 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2535 \begin_inset Newline newline
2538 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2540 menu accelerator keys
2543 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2544 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2548 \begin_layout Standard
2549 For example, the sequence
2550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2556 \begin_inset space ~
2560 \begin_inset space ~
2566 \begin_inset space ~
2574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2578 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2582 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2587 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2593 \begin_inset space ~
2599 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2609 \begin_layout Standard
2614 manual lists all other things bound to the
2622 \begin_layout Standard
2623 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2625 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2626 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2627 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2628 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2629 The \SpecialChar LyX
2630 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2631 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2632 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2634 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2650 followed by a capital
2657 \begin_layout Chapter
2660 \begin_inset Index idx
2663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2673 \begin_layout Section
2675 \begin_inset Index idx
2678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2687 \begin_layout Subsection
2691 \begin_layout Standard
2692 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2693 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2694 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2695 numbering schemes, and so on.
2696 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2697 and format the title of your document differently.
2700 \begin_layout Standard
2705 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2706 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2707 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2708 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2709 picks one for you by default.
2710 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2713 \begin_layout Subsection
2715 \begin_inset Index idx
2718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2725 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2727 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2734 \begin_layout Standard
2735 You can select a class using the
2737 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2738 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2742 \begin_inset Index idx
2745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2752 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2756 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2760 \begin_layout Standard
2761 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2766 \begin_layout Description
2767 Article for basic articles
2770 \begin_layout Description
2771 Report for basic reports
2774 \begin_layout Description
2775 Book for writing a book
2778 \begin_layout Description
2779 Letter for US-style letters
2782 \begin_layout Standard
2783 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2784 only uses if you have installed
2785 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2786 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2787 distributions will include
2789 Here are some of the classes.
2790 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2792 Special Document Classes
2801 \begin_layout Description
2802 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2805 \begin_layout Description
2806 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2810 \begin_layout Description
2811 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2815 \begin_layout Description
2816 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2817 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2818 There are three article layouts available.
2819 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2820 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2821 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2822 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2827 sequential numbering
2828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2831 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2832 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2833 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2834 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2837 \begin_layout Description
2838 Beamer Layout for presentations
2841 \begin_layout Description
2842 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2843 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2844 document class, but a new one that is distributed
2845 with \SpecialChar LyX
2849 \begin_layout Description
2850 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2853 \begin_layout Description
2855 \begin_inset space ~
2858 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
2861 \begin_layout Description
2862 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
2865 \begin_layout Description
2866 Foils Used to make transparencies
2869 \begin_layout Description
2870 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
2871 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2872 document class, but a new one that is distributed
2873 with \SpecialChar LyX
2877 \begin_layout Description
2878 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
2879 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
2882 \begin_layout Description
2883 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
2886 \begin_layout Description
2887 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
2890 \begin_layout Description
2891 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
2892 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
2893 (Is used by this document.)
2896 \begin_layout Description
2897 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
2900 \begin_layout Description
2901 Powerdot Layout for presentations
2904 \begin_layout Description
2909 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
2910 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
2912 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
2916 \begin_layout Description
2917 Slides Used to make transparencies
2920 \begin_layout Description
2922 \begin_inset space ~
2925 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
2926 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
2929 \begin_layout Description
2930 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
2933 \begin_layout Standard
2934 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
2936 You can find details about the non-standard classes in Chapter 6 of the
2942 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
2943 of the document classes.
2946 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2950 \begin_layout Standard
2951 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
2953 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2954 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2956 \begin_inset Index idx
2959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2968 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2972 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2976 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
2977 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
2979 So it may seem that something is wrong.
2982 \begin_layout Standard
2985 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
2990 , are highly specialized.
2992 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
2993 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
2994 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
2995 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
2996 by some document class.
2997 There are just too many of them.
2998 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3001 \begin_layout Standard
3002 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3003 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3007 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3010 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3011 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3012 document class for a new file.
3014 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3019 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3028 manual for information on how to install them.
3029 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3035 \begin_layout Standard
3036 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3037 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3038 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3039 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3040 class files to be used for dissertation
3041 s submitted to those universities.
3042 The \SpecialChar LyX
3043 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3045 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3049 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3055 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3058 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3060 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3062 name "subsec:Modules"
3067 \begin_inset Index idx
3070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3079 \begin_layout Standard
3080 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3081 chosen document class.
3082 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3083 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3090 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3094 \begin_inset Index idx
3097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3104 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3108 \begin_layout Standard
3109 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3110 packages or file format converters that are not always
3111 installed by default.
3113 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3114 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3115 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3116 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3118 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3119 file without the missing prerequisites.
3120 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3121 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3124 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3128 \begin_inset Index idx
3131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3132 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3142 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3151 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3154 \begin_layout Standard
3155 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3163 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3165 will advise you about these things.
3173 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3175 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3177 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3182 \begin_inset Index idx
3185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3186 Document ! Local Layout
3194 \begin_layout Standard
3195 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3196 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3197 : They are intended to be used in
3198 a variety of different documents.
3199 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3200 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3201 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3202 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3203 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3205 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3223 manual for information on how to use it.
3226 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3230 \begin_layout Standard
3231 Each class has a default set of options.
3232 Here's a quick table describing them:
3235 \begin_layout Standard
3236 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3242 \begin_layout Standard
3244 \begin_inset Tabular
3245 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3246 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3247 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3248 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3249 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3250 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3251 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3705 \begin_layout Standard
3706 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3712 \begin_layout Standard
3713 You're probably also wondering what
3714 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3718 \begin_inset space ~
3722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3726 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3727 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3732 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3737 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3747 headings, there are also
3755 headings, and so on.
3756 We will describe these headings fully in section
3757 \begin_inset space ~
3761 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3763 reference "subsec:Headings"
3770 \begin_layout Subsection
3772 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3774 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3779 \begin_inset Index idx
3782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3789 \begin_inset Index idx
3792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3801 \begin_layout Standard
3802 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3804 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3811 \begin_inset space ~
3819 \begin_inset space ~
3824 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3826 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3827 doesn't support special options you want to
3828 use for your document.
3829 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3830 -class and its options, you have to read
3834 \begin_layout Standard
3838 \begin_inset space ~
3845 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3851 \begin_inset space ~
3856 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3857 You can choose between the following five options:
3860 \begin_layout Labeling
3861 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3866 Use default page style of current class.
3869 \begin_layout Labeling
3870 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3875 No page numbers or headings.
3878 \begin_layout Labeling
3879 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3887 \begin_layout Labeling
3888 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3893 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
3894 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
3895 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
3896 maximum sectioning level of the class.
3899 \begin_layout Labeling
3900 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3905 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
3906 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3912 \begin_inset Index idx
3915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3917 -packages ! fancyhdr
3923 How they are defined is explained in section
3924 \begin_inset space ~
3928 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3930 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
3937 \begin_layout Standard
3938 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
3939 \begin_inset space ~
3943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3945 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
3952 \begin_layout Subsection
3953 Paper Size and Orientation
3954 \begin_inset Index idx
3957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3958 Document ! Paper size
3964 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3966 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
3973 \begin_layout Standard
3974 You can find the following options in the menu
3977 \begin_inset space ~
3984 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3988 \begin_inset Index idx
3991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4000 \begin_layout Labeling
4001 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4005 \begin_inset space ~
4010 What size paper to print on.
4015 \begin_layout Itemize
4021 \begin_layout Itemize
4027 \begin_layout Itemize
4033 \begin_layout Itemize
4039 \begin_layout Itemize
4042 US letter, US legal, US executive
4045 \begin_layout Itemize
4051 \begin_layout Itemize
4058 \begin_layout Labeling
4059 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4064 To choose whether to output as
4075 \begin_layout Labeling
4076 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4080 \begin_inset space ~
4085 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4086 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4089 \begin_layout Subsection
4091 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4093 name "subsec:Margins"
4098 \begin_inset Index idx
4101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4108 \begin_inset Index idx
4111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4120 \begin_layout Standard
4121 Paper margins are set in the menu
4123 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4127 \begin_inset Index idx
4130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4139 \begin_layout Standard
4140 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4141 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4142 the paper format and the font size into account.
4145 \begin_layout Subsection
4149 \begin_layout Standard
4150 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4156 That includes the paragraph environments.
4157 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4158 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4159 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4161 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4162 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4166 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4170 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4172 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4173 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4174 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4177 \begin_layout Section
4178 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4179 \begin_inset Index idx
4182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4183 Paragraph ! Indentation
4191 \begin_layout Subsection
4193 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4195 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4202 \begin_layout Standard
4203 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4204 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4207 \begin_layout Standard
4208 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4209 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4210 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4211 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4215 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4221 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4222 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4223 language than English.
4225 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4228 \begin_layout Standard
4229 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4230 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4231 into \SpecialChar LyX
4233 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4236 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4238 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4239 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4240 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4247 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4248 goes to produce a printable file.
4253 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4255 gives you the ability globally to change
4259 these pre-coded spacings.
4260 We will explain more later.
4263 \begin_layout Subsection
4264 Paragraph Separation
4265 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4267 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4272 \begin_inset Index idx
4275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4276 Paragraph ! Separation
4284 \begin_layout Standard
4292 \begin_inset space ~
4300 \begin_inset space ~
4307 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4311 \begin_inset Index idx
4314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4320 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4323 \begin_layout Subsection
4327 \begin_layout Standard
4328 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4331 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4333 \begin_inset space ~
4338 dialog and toggle the
4341 \begin_inset space ~
4346 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4349 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4353 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4354 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4358 \begin_layout Standard
4359 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4360 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4363 \begin_layout Subsection
4365 \begin_inset Index idx
4368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4369 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4377 \begin_layout Standard
4380 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4384 \begin_inset Index idx
4387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4396 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4400 \begin_inset space ~
4409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4410 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4416 \begin_inset Index idx
4419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4421 -packages ! setspace
4426 installed to use this feature.
4431 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4433 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4435 \begin_inset space ~
4440 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4441 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4444 \begin_layout Section
4445 Paragraph Environments
4446 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4448 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4453 \begin_inset Index idx
4456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4457 Paragraph ! Environments
4463 \begin_inset Index idx
4466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4467 Paragraph environments|(
4475 \begin_layout Subsection
4479 \begin_layout Standard
4480 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4483 \begin_layout Standard
4502 \begin_inset Newline newline
4505 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4507 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4508 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4509 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4518 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4521 \begin_layout Standard
4522 A paragraph environment is simply a
4523 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4527 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4530 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4531 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4532 scheme, labels, and so on.
4533 Additionally, you can
4534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4541 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4542 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4543 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4544 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4546 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4548 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4551 \begin_layout Standard
4552 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4553 \begin_inset Graphics
4554 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4560 at the left end of the toolbar.
4562 will change the environment of the
4566 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4567 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4568 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4572 \begin_layout Standard
4581 create a new paragraph using the
4585 paragraph environment.
4587 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4591 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4594 because if you are in one of these environments:
4597 \begin_layout Itemize
4603 \begin_layout Itemize
4609 \begin_layout Itemize
4615 \begin_layout Itemize
4621 \begin_layout Itemize
4627 \begin_layout Itemize
4633 \begin_layout Itemize
4639 \begin_layout Standard
4641 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4645 , rather than resetting it to
4650 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4651 \begin_inset space ~
4655 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4657 reference "sec:Nesting"
4664 \begin_layout Subsection
4668 \begin_layout Standard
4669 The default paragraph environment is
4674 It creates a plain paragraph.
4676 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4677 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4678 this manual) are in the
4685 \begin_layout Standard
4686 You can nest a paragraph using the
4690 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4698 \begin_layout Subsection
4700 \begin_inset Index idx
4703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4712 \begin_layout Standard
4713 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4714 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4716 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4723 for thanks or contact information.
4724 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4725 places all of this on a separate page
4726 along with today's date.
4727 For other types of documents, the title
4728 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4732 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4735 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4739 \begin_layout Standard
4741 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4755 Here's how you use them:
4758 \begin_layout Itemize
4759 Put the title of your document in the
4766 \begin_layout Itemize
4767 Put the author name in the
4774 \begin_layout Itemize
4775 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4776 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4782 Note that using this environment is optional.
4783 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4784 will automatically insert today's date.
4785 If you don't want a date, use the option
4787 Suppress default date on front page
4791 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4792 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4794 \begin_inset space ~
4802 \begin_layout Standard
4803 You can use footnotes to insert
4804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4811 or contact information.
4814 \begin_layout Subsection
4816 \begin_inset Index idx
4819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4826 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4828 name "subsec:Headings"
4835 \begin_layout Standard
4836 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4838 takes care of the numbering for you.
4841 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4843 \begin_inset Index idx
4846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4847 Section headings ! Numbered
4855 \begin_layout Standard
4856 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4860 \begin_layout Enumerate
4866 \begin_layout Enumerate
4872 \begin_layout Enumerate
4878 \begin_layout Enumerate
4884 \begin_layout Enumerate
4890 \begin_layout Enumerate
4896 \begin_layout Enumerate
4902 \begin_layout Standard
4904 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
4905 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
4906 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
4909 \begin_layout Standard
4910 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
4911 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
4912 You group the book into chapters.
4914 does a similar grouping:
4917 \begin_layout Itemize
4922 is divided into either
4933 \begin_layout Itemize
4945 \begin_layout Itemize
4957 \begin_layout Itemize
4969 \begin_layout Itemize
4981 \begin_layout Itemize
4993 \begin_layout Standard
4994 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5002 Not all document types use the
5006 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5011 is the top-level heading.
5019 \begin_layout Standard
5024 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5025 labels it with its number,
5026 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5028 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5030 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5034 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5040 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5042 \begin_inset Index idx
5045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5046 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5054 \begin_layout Standard
5055 The unnumbered section headings have a
5056 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5060 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5063 at the end of their name.
5064 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5065 the table of contents, see section
5066 \begin_inset space ~
5070 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5079 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5080 Changing the Numbering
5081 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5083 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5090 \begin_layout Standard
5091 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5092 in the Table of Contents.
5093 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5095 Just as certain classes start with
5109 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5119 This is something you can change.
5122 \begin_layout Standard
5125 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5129 \begin_inset Index idx
5132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5141 \begin_inset space ~
5145 \begin_inset space ~
5150 you will see two counters.
5155 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5156 numbers a section heading.
5157 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5161 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5162 Short Titles of Headings
5163 \begin_inset Index idx
5166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5167 Section headings ! Short titles
5173 \begin_inset Argument 1
5176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5183 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5185 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5192 \begin_layout Standard
5193 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5194 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5195 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5196 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5199 \begin_layout Standard
5201 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5202 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5203 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5204 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5207 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5209 \begin_inset space ~
5215 This will insert a box labeled
5216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5220 \begin_inset space ~
5224 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5227 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5228 This also works for captions inside floats.
5229 There can only be one short title per title.
5232 \begin_layout Standard
5233 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5236 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5240 \begin_layout Standard
5241 The following information applies to all section headings:
5244 \begin_layout Itemize
5245 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5248 \begin_layout Itemize
5249 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5252 \begin_layout Itemize
5253 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5256 \begin_layout Itemize
5257 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5260 \begin_layout Subsection
5264 \begin_layout Standard
5266 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5280 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5281 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5282 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5283 the text they contain.
5284 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5292 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5295 \begin_layout Standard
5296 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5305 when you start a new paragraph.
5306 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5310 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5311 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5312 have to change back to the
5316 environment yourself.
5319 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5321 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5328 \begin_inset Index idx
5331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5340 \begin_layout Standard
5341 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5342 time for the differences.
5351 are identical except for one difference:
5355 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5364 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5367 \begin_layout Standard
5368 Here's an example of the
5381 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5383 See – no indentation!
5387 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5388 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5389 the other paragraph.
5392 \begin_layout Standard
5393 Here's another example, this time in the
5400 \begin_layout Quotation
5406 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5407 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5408 the first line, then
5412 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5416 you were quoting other text.
5419 \begin_layout Quotation
5420 Here's a new paragraph.
5421 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5422 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5425 \begin_layout Standard
5426 As the examples show,
5430 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5431 They should put quotes in the
5436 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5440 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5443 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5445 \begin_inset Index idx
5448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5455 \begin_inset Index idx
5458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5465 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5474 \begin_layout Standard
5479 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5485 \begin_inset Newline newline
5488 Which I did not rehearse!
5492 It could be much worse.
5493 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5495 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5496 indented a bit more than the first.
5497 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5503 \begin_inset Newline newline
5506 And make things look fine
5507 \begin_inset Newline newline
5513 arg "newline-insert newline"
5519 \begin_layout Standard
5524 does not indent both margins.
5525 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5526 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5529 arg "newline-insert newline"
5535 \begin_layout Subsection
5537 \begin_inset Index idx
5540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5547 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5556 \begin_layout Standard
5558 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5568 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5569 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5578 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5579 lets you provide your own label.
5580 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5581 describing some general features of all four of them.
5584 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5588 \begin_layout Standard
5589 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5591 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5592 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5601 reset the environment to
5605 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5606 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5607 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5611 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5615 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5622 \begin_layout Standard
5623 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5624 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5625 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5627 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5628 you read all of section
5629 \begin_inset space ~
5633 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5635 reference "sec:Nesting"
5642 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5644 \begin_inset Index idx
5647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5654 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5663 \begin_layout Standard
5664 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5668 paragraph environment.
5669 It has the following properties:
5672 \begin_layout Itemize
5673 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5677 \begin_layout Itemize
5679 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5682 \begin_layout Itemize
5683 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5687 \begin_layout Itemize
5688 The items can have any length.
5690 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5691 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5698 \begin_layout Itemize
5703 environment inside another
5707 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5711 \begin_layout Itemize
5712 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5715 \begin_layout Itemize
5717 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5720 \begin_layout Itemize
5722 \begin_inset space ~
5726 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5728 reference "sec:Nesting"
5732 for a full explanation of nesting.
5736 \begin_layout Standard
5737 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5746 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5749 \begin_layout Standard
5750 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5751 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5754 \begin_layout Itemize
5755 The label for the first level
5759 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5763 \begin_layout Itemize
5764 The label for the second level is a dash.
5768 \begin_layout Itemize
5769 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5773 \begin_layout Itemize
5774 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5778 \begin_layout Itemize
5779 Back out to the third level.
5783 \begin_layout Itemize
5784 Back to the second level.
5788 \begin_layout Itemize
5789 Back to the outermost level.
5792 \begin_layout Standard
5793 These are the default labels for an
5798 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5800 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5803 dialog in the submenu
5808 \begin_inset Index idx
5811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5817 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5821 \begin_layout Standard
5822 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5823 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5825 \begin_inset space ~
5829 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5831 reference "sec:Nesting"
5838 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5840 \begin_inset Index idx
5843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5850 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5852 name "sec:Enumerate"
5859 \begin_layout Standard
5864 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
5865 It has these properties:
5868 \begin_layout Enumerate
5869 Each item has a numeral as its label.
5873 \begin_layout Enumerate
5874 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
5878 \begin_layout Enumerate
5880 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
5883 \begin_layout Enumerate
5888 environment resets the counter to one.
5891 \begin_layout Enumerate
5904 \begin_layout Enumerate
5905 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
5906 Items can have any length.
5909 \begin_layout Enumerate
5910 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
5913 \begin_layout Enumerate
5914 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
5917 \begin_layout Enumerate
5918 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
5922 \begin_layout Standard
5931 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
5933 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
5934 labels the four different levels in an
5941 \begin_layout Enumerate
5942 The first level of an
5946 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
5950 \begin_layout Enumerate
5951 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
5955 \begin_layout Enumerate
5956 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
5960 \begin_layout Enumerate
5961 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
5964 \begin_layout Enumerate
5965 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
5970 \begin_layout Enumerate
5971 Back to the third level
5975 \begin_layout Enumerate
5976 Back to the second level.
5980 \begin_layout Enumerate
5981 Back to the outermost level.
5984 \begin_layout Standard
5985 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
5989 environment, see section
5990 \begin_inset space ~
5994 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5996 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6001 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6005 \begin_layout Standard
6006 There is more to nesting
6010 environments than we've stated here.
6011 You should read section
6012 \begin_inset space ~
6016 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6018 reference "sec:Nesting"
6022 to learn more about nesting.
6025 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6027 \begin_inset Index idx
6030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6039 \begin_layout Standard
6040 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6044 list has no fixed label.
6045 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6047 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6051 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6054 of the first line as the label.
6058 \begin_layout Description
6059 Example: This is an example of the
6066 \begin_layout Standard
6068 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6072 \begin_layout Standard
6074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6078 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6081 it is meant that the first usage of the
6085 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6087 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6095 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6100 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6101 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6103 \begin_inset space ~
6109 \begin_inset space ~
6113 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6115 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6119 for more information.) Here is an example:
6122 \begin_layout Description
6124 \begin_inset space ~
6127 Example: This one shows how to use a
6130 \begin_inset space ~
6142 \begin_layout Description
6143 Usage: You should use the
6147 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6148 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6150 It's not a good idea to use a
6154 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6155 You're better off using
6167 paragraphs into them.
6170 \begin_layout Description
6171 Nesting: You can nest
6175 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6179 \begin_layout Standard
6180 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6181 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6182 them from the first line.
6185 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6187 \begin_inset Index idx
6190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6199 \begin_layout Standard
6204 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6205 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6209 \begin_layout Standard
6218 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6220 Here are its properties:
6223 \begin_layout Labeling
6224 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6226 \begin_inset space ~
6229 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6231 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6238 of each line as the item label.
6243 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6244 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6245 space as described above.
6248 \begin_layout Labeling
6249 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6250 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6251 uses different margins for the item label and the
6252 body of the item text.
6253 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6254 label width plus a little extra space.
6258 \begin_layout Labeling
6259 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6261 \begin_inset space ~
6264 width \SpecialChar LyX
6265 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6266 If the label width is larger, the label
6267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6274 into the first line.
6275 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6276 margin of the rest of the item text.
6279 \begin_layout Labeling
6280 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6282 \begin_inset space ~
6285 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6290 environment has the same left margin.
6291 \begin_inset Newline newline
6294 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6297 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6299 \begin_inset space ~
6304 dialog (toolbar button
6307 arg "layout-paragraph"
6314 \begin_inset space ~
6319 determines the default label width.
6320 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6329 multiple times instead.
6330 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6333 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6337 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6340 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6343 \begin_inset space ~
6348 every time you alter a label in a
6353 \begin_inset Newline newline
6356 The predefined default width is the length of
6357 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6361 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6365 \begin_inset space ~
6371 \begin_layout Standard
6376 list the same way as the
6380 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6386 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6390 \begin_layout Standard
6395 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6396 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6398 \begin_inset space ~
6402 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6404 reference "sec:Nesting"
6408 to learn about nesting.
6411 \begin_layout Standard
6412 There is yet another feature of the
6416 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6417 left-justifies the item labels by
6419 You can use additional
6423 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6424 justifies the item label.
6429 are documented in section
6430 \begin_inset space ~
6434 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6436 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6441 Here are some examples:
6444 \begin_layout Labeling
6445 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6446 Left The default for
6453 \begin_layout Labeling
6454 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6455 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6462 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6465 \begin_layout Labeling
6466 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6467 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6471 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6478 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6481 \begin_layout Subsection
6483 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6485 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6490 \begin_inset Index idx
6493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6502 \begin_layout Standard
6503 The features described in this section require that the module
6505 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6507 is loaded in the document settings.
6508 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6514 \begin_inset Index idx
6517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6519 -packages ! enumitem
6527 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6528 Custom Enumerate Lists
6529 \begin_inset Index idx
6532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6533 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6541 \begin_layout Standard
6543 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6546 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6549 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6550 There you add the command
6553 \begin_layout Standard
6561 \begin_layout Standard
6573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6574 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6575 Code, look at section
6576 \begin_inset space ~
6580 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6582 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6595 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6602 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6603 For capital Roman numerals replace
6615 in the command above.
6616 For Arabic numerals use
6624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6628 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6631 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6646 \begin_layout Standard
6648 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6656 You can only number 26
6657 \begin_inset space ~
6660 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6668 \begin_layout Standard
6669 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6670 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6673 \begin_layout Standard
6674 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6677 \begin_layout Enumerate
6678 \begin_inset Argument 1
6681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6707 \begin_layout Enumerate
6708 \begin_inset Argument 1
6711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6734 \begin_layout Enumerate
6739 \begin_layout Enumerate
6740 \begin_inset Argument 1
6743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6767 \begin_layout Enumerate
6768 \begin_inset Argument 1
6771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6797 \begin_layout Standard
6798 For this list these commands were used:
6801 \begin_layout Standard
6812 \begin_inset Newline newline
6820 \begin_inset Newline newline
6828 \begin_inset Newline newline
6838 \begin_layout Standard
6845 makes the label emphasized and
6854 \begin_layout Standard
6855 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6863 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
6864 lists until you change the definition.
6872 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6874 \begin_inset Index idx
6877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6878 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
6886 \begin_layout Standard
6887 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
6890 \begin_layout Enumerate
6891 \begin_inset Argument 1
6894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6913 \begin_inset Note Note
6916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6917 goes back to default numbering
6925 \begin_layout Enumerate
6929 \begin_layout Standard
6933 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
6937 \begin_layout Standard
6938 To resume an enumeration, use the style
6943 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
6944 to indicate that it is a resumed
6945 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
6946 , but in the output.
6949 \begin_layout Standard
6950 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6958 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
6967 \begin_layout Standard
6968 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
6970 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
6971 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
6972 of a normal enumeration.
6973 There, insert the command
6976 \begin_layout Standard
6982 \begin_layout Standard
6987 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
6991 \begin_layout Enumerate
6995 \begin_layout Enumerate
6999 \begin_layout Standard
7000 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7003 \begin_layout Enumerate
7004 \begin_inset Argument 1
7007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7023 This enumeration starts at 4
7026 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7028 \begin_inset Index idx
7031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7040 \begin_layout Standard
7041 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7043 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7046 \begin_layout Itemize
7050 \begin_layout Itemize
7051 with standard spacing
7054 \begin_layout Standard
7055 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7057 Add there the command
7061 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7064 \begin_layout Itemize
7065 \begin_inset Argument 1
7068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7087 \begin_layout Itemize
7091 \begin_layout Itemize
7095 \begin_layout Standard
7096 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7103 \begin_inset Index idx
7106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7108 -packages ! enumitem
7114 For more information see its documentation,
7115 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7124 \begin_layout Standard
7125 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7127 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7128 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7129 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7132 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7135 \begin_layout Enumerate
7136 \begin_inset Argument 1
7139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7147 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7160 \begin_layout Enumerate
7161 with negative indentation
7164 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7165 Further Customization
7166 \begin_inset Index idx
7169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7170 Lists ! Customization
7178 \begin_layout Standard
7179 You can also change the style of description lists.
7183 \begin_layout Standard
7189 \begin_layout Standard
7190 changes the description label font, the command
7193 \begin_layout Standard
7199 \begin_layout Standard
7200 sets the list style.
7203 \begin_layout Standard
7204 An example where the command
7207 \begin_layout Standard
7212 itshape, style=nextline
7215 \begin_layout Standard
7219 \begin_layout Description
7221 \begin_inset space ~
7225 \begin_inset Argument 1
7228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7234 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7236 itshape, style=nextline
7246 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7247 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7251 \begin_layout Description
7253 \begin_inset space ~
7256 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7257 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7258 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7261 \begin_layout Standard
7262 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7268 \begin_inset Index idx
7271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7273 -packages ! enumitem
7279 For more information see its documentation
7280 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7289 \begin_layout Subsection
7291 \begin_inset Index idx
7294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7303 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7305 \begin_inset space ~
7308 Address: An Overview
7311 \begin_layout Standard
7312 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7313 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7321 \begin_inset space ~
7327 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7328 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7329 gags on the document.
7330 In contrast, you can use the
7337 \begin_inset space ~
7342 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7343 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7347 \begin_layout Standard
7348 Of course, you're not limited to using
7355 \begin_inset space ~
7364 \begin_inset space ~
7369 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7370 some European academic papers.
7373 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7375 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7377 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7384 \begin_layout Standard
7389 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7390 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7394 \begin_inset space ~
7399 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7400 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7401 Here's an example of each:
7404 \begin_layout Right Address
7406 \begin_inset Newline newline
7410 \begin_inset Newline newline
7414 \begin_inset Newline newline
7417 When is it? What is today?
7420 \begin_layout Standard
7424 \begin_inset space ~
7430 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7432 the largest block of text on a single line.
7433 Here's an example of the
7440 \begin_layout Address
7442 \begin_inset Newline newline
7445 Where do I send this
7446 \begin_inset Newline newline
7449 Your post office and country
7452 \begin_layout Standard
7453 As you can see, both
7460 \begin_inset space ~
7465 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7470 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7471 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7477 This makes sense, since
7485 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7486 Thus, you have to use
7493 arg "newline-insert newline"
7498 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7499 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7501 \begin_inset space ~
7505 \begin_inset space ~
7510 ) to start a new line in an
7517 \begin_inset space ~
7525 \begin_layout Subsection
7529 \begin_layout Standard
7530 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7531 or list of references.
7533 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7536 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7538 \begin_inset Index idx
7541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7550 \begin_layout Standard
7555 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7556 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7557 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7558 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7572 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7573 The book document classes ignores the
7577 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7581 in a letter document class.
7584 \begin_layout Standard
7589 environment does several things for you.
7590 First, it puts the centered label
7591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7599 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7601 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7602 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7603 the subsequent text.
7604 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7606 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7610 \begin_layout Standard
7611 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7615 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7616 The new paragraph will still be in the
7621 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7622 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7625 \begin_layout Standard
7626 \begin_inset Float figure
7631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7633 \begin_inset Graphics
7634 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7642 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7645 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7647 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7668 \begin_layout Standard
7669 We would love to demonstrate the
7673 environment, but since this document is in the
7674 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7678 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7681 class, we can't do this.
7682 We inserted it therefore as figure
7683 \begin_inset space ~
7687 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7689 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7694 If you have never heard of an
7695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7699 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7702 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7705 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7707 \begin_inset Index idx
7710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7717 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7719 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7726 \begin_layout Standard
7731 environment is used to list references.
7732 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7733 only use it at the end of the document.
7745 \begin_layout Standard
7746 When you first open a
7750 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7751 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7767 depending on the document class.
7768 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7769 Each paragraph of the
7773 environment is a bibliography entry.
7778 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7779 Each new paragraph is still in the
7786 \begin_layout Standard
7787 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7788 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7790 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7792 handling, have a look at section
7793 \begin_inset space ~
7797 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7799 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7806 \begin_layout Subsection
7807 Special Environments
7810 \begin_layout Standard
7812 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7813 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7816 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7821 \begin_inset Index idx
7824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7832 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7834 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
7841 \begin_layout Standard
7847 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7849 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7854 key as a fixed whitespace.
7858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7871 \begin_inset space ~
7876 instead of an end-of-word marker.
7890 are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
7893 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
7896 arg "newline-insert newline"
7913 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7914 So, when you finish using the
7919 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
7920 Also, you can nest the
7925 environment inside of others.
7928 \begin_layout Standard
7929 There are a few quirks with this environment:
7932 \begin_layout Itemize
7936 arg "newline-insert newline"
7939 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
7940 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7944 \begin_inset space \space{}
7954 arg "newline-insert newline"
7960 \begin_layout Itemize
7964 arg "newline-insert newline"
7974 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
7980 \begin_layout Itemize
7981 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
7982 You must put at least one
7986 in any line you want blank.
7987 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
7991 \begin_layout Itemize
7992 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
7996 since that will insert
8001 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8004 arg "self-insert \""
8010 \begin_layout Standard
8014 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8018 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8022 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8026 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8030 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8031 printf("Hello World!
8036 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8040 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8044 \begin_layout Standard
8045 This is just the standard
8046 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8050 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8057 \begin_layout Standard
8063 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8065 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8066 as if you used a typewriter.
8067 \begin_inset Index idx
8070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8071 Paragraph environments|)
8076 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8079 Program Code Listings
8084 \begin_inset space ~
8092 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8096 \begin_inset Index idx
8099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8108 \begin_layout Standard
8113 environment is similar to the
8118 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8119 computer console text.
8124 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8138 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8139 you can have empty lines.
8152 \begin_layout Itemize
8153 have a certain language and a text style
8156 \begin_layout Itemize
8157 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8158 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8159 and \SpecialChar TeX
8163 \begin_layout Standard
8164 Because of these properties
8168 works like a typewriter.
8172 \begin_layout Verbatim
8176 \begin_layout Verbatim
8179 The following 2 lines are empty:
8182 \begin_layout Verbatim
8186 \begin_layout Verbatim
8190 \begin_layout Verbatim
8191 Almost everything is allowed in verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8196 \begin_layout Section
8197 Nesting Environments
8198 \begin_inset Index idx
8201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8202 Nesting ! Environments
8208 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8217 \begin_layout Subsection
8221 \begin_layout Standard
8223 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8225 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8227 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8229 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8231 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8241 \begin_layout Enumerate
8245 \begin_layout Enumerate
8250 \begin_layout Enumerate
8254 \begin_layout Enumerate
8259 \begin_layout Enumerate
8263 \begin_layout Standard
8264 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8265 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8267 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8269 \begin_inset space ~
8273 \begin_inset space ~
8281 \begin_inset space ~
8285 \begin_inset space ~
8290 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8292 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8295 arg "depth-increment"
8301 arg "depth-decrement"
8315 arg "depth-increment"
8321 arg "depth-decrement"
8325 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8326 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8330 \begin_layout Standard
8331 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8332 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8333 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8334 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8335 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8338 \begin_layout Standard
8339 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8341 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8343 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8346 \begin_layout Subsection
8347 What You Can and Can't Nest
8350 \begin_layout Standard
8351 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8352 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8355 \begin_layout Standard
8356 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8357 than a simple yes or no.
8358 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8361 \begin_layout Itemize
8362 Completely unnestable
8365 \begin_layout Itemize
8366 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8370 \begin_layout Itemize
8371 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8375 \begin_layout Standard
8376 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8377 environments have them:
8380 \begin_layout Description
8381 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8382 Can't nest into them.
8386 \begin_layout Itemize
8392 \begin_layout Itemize
8398 \begin_layout Itemize
8404 \begin_layout Itemize
8410 \begin_layout Itemize
8417 \begin_layout Description
8419 \begin_inset space ~
8422 Nestable You can nest them.
8423 You can nest other things into them.
8427 \begin_layout Itemize
8433 \begin_layout Itemize
8439 \begin_layout Itemize
8445 \begin_layout Itemize
8451 \begin_layout Itemize
8457 \begin_layout Itemize
8463 \begin_layout Itemize
8469 \begin_layout Itemize
8476 \begin_layout Itemize
8483 \begin_layout Description
8484 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8485 You can't nest anything into them.
8489 \begin_layout Itemize
8495 \begin_layout Itemize
8501 \begin_layout Itemize
8507 \begin_layout Itemize
8513 \begin_layout Itemize
8519 \begin_layout Itemize
8525 \begin_layout Itemize
8531 \begin_layout Itemize
8537 \begin_layout Itemize
8543 \begin_layout Itemize
8549 \begin_layout Itemize
8555 \begin_layout Itemize
8561 \begin_layout Itemize
8567 \begin_layout Itemize
8571 \begin_inset space ~
8577 \begin_layout Itemize
8584 \begin_layout Standard
8585 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8593 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8603 \begin_inset space ~
8606 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8607 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8608 nested section headings violate this.
8616 \begin_layout Subsection
8617 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8618 \begin_inset Index idx
8621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8622 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8630 \begin_layout Standard
8631 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8632 affected by nesting anyhow.
8636 \begin_layout Itemize
8640 \begin_layout Itemize
8644 \begin_layout Itemize
8648 \begin_layout Standard
8650 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8658 Figures and tables in
8662 are not affected by this.
8667 Have a look at section
8668 \begin_inset space ~
8672 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8674 reference "sec:Floats"
8678 for more information about
8685 \begin_layout Standard
8687 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8688 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8692 \begin_layout Standard
8693 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8694 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8701 of its own, it behaves just like a
8702 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8706 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8709 paragraph environment.
8710 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8714 \begin_layout Standard
8715 Here's an example with a table:
8718 \begin_layout Enumerate
8723 \begin_layout Enumerate
8724 This is (a) and it's nested.
8728 \begin_layout Standard
8729 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8735 \begin_layout Standard
8737 \begin_inset Tabular
8738 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8739 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8740 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8741 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8825 \begin_layout Standard
8826 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8833 \begin_layout Enumerate
8835 The table is actually nested inside (a).
8839 \begin_layout Enumerate
8843 \begin_layout Standard
8844 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
8847 \begin_layout Enumerate
8852 \begin_layout Enumerate
8853 This is (a) and it's nested.
8857 \begin_layout Standard
8858 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8864 \begin_layout Standard
8866 \begin_inset Tabular
8867 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8868 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8869 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8870 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8954 \begin_layout Standard
8955 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8961 \begin_layout Enumerate
8968 In fact, it's not nested at all.
8971 \begin_layout Enumerate
8975 \begin_layout Standard
8976 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
8980 \begin_layout Standard
8981 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
8984 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
8987 \begin_layout Enumerate
8992 \begin_layout Enumerate
8993 This is (a) and it's nested.
8996 \begin_layout Standard
8997 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9003 \begin_layout Standard
9005 \begin_inset Tabular
9006 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9007 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9008 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9009 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9094 \begin_layout Standard
9095 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9101 \begin_layout Enumerate
9103 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9110 \begin_layout Enumerate
9114 \begin_layout Standard
9115 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9121 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9122 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9126 \begin_layout Subsection
9127 Usage and General Features
9130 \begin_layout Standard
9131 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9132 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9134 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9138 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9141 is the innermost possible depth.
9142 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9145 \begin_layout Enumerate
9146 level #1 – outermost
9150 \begin_layout Enumerate
9155 \begin_layout Enumerate
9160 \begin_layout Enumerate
9165 \begin_layout Itemize
9170 \begin_layout Itemize
9179 \begin_layout Standard
9180 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9181 both of them in the example.
9182 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9192 For example, if we tried to nest another
9197 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9201 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9204 , we would get errors.
9207 \begin_layout Subsection
9209 \begin_inset Index idx
9212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9221 \begin_layout Standard
9222 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9223 We have several examples of nested environments.
9224 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9228 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9229 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9232 \begin_layout Labeling
9233 \labelwidthstring MMM
9234 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9243 \begin_layout Labeling
9244 \labelwidthstring MMM
9245 #2-a This is level #2.
9246 We created it by using
9249 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9255 arg "depth-increment"
9262 \begin_layout Labeling
9263 \labelwidthstring MMM
9264 #3-a This is level #3.
9265 This time, we just enter
9272 arg "depth-increment"
9276 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9280 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9286 arg "depth-increment"
9293 \begin_layout Standard
9298 environment, nested inside of
9299 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9303 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9307 So, it's at level #4.
9308 We did this by entering
9311 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9317 arg "depth-increment"
9320 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9325 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9341 \begin_layout Standard
9346 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9349 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9355 \begin_layout Labeling
9356 \labelwidthstring MMM
9357 #4-a This is level #4.
9361 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9364 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9369 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9373 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9378 keep nesting things inside
9379 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9383 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9390 \begin_layout Labeling
9391 \labelwidthstring MMM
9392 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9397 \begin_layout Labeling
9398 \labelwidthstring MMM
9399 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9400 and this is level #6.
9401 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9405 \begin_layout Labeling
9406 \labelwidthstring MMM
9407 #5-b Back to level #5.
9411 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9417 arg "depth-decrement"
9424 \begin_layout Labeling
9425 \labelwidthstring MMM
9429 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9435 arg "depth-decrement"
9438 , we're back at level #4.
9442 \begin_layout Labeling
9443 \labelwidthstring MMM
9444 #3-b Back to level #3.
9445 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9449 \begin_layout Labeling
9450 \labelwidthstring MMM
9451 #2-b Back to level #2.
9456 \begin_layout Labeling
9457 \labelwidthstring MMM
9458 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9459 After this sentence, we will enter
9463 and change the paragraph environment back to
9470 \begin_layout Standard
9471 We could have also used the
9487 environment in place of the
9492 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9495 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9496 Example 2: Inheritance
9499 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9500 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9503 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9512 arg "depth-increment"
9516 \begin_inset Newline newline
9519 which, we will change to the
9527 \begin_layout Enumerate
9532 environment, at level #2.
9535 \begin_layout Enumerate
9536 Notice how the nested
9540 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9544 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9548 \begin_layout Standard
9549 We ended this example by entering
9554 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9558 and reset the nesting depth by using
9561 arg "depth-decrement"
9567 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9568 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9577 \begin_inset Argument 1
9580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9581 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9589 \begin_layout Enumerate
9590 This is level #1, in an
9594 paragraph environment.
9595 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9599 \begin_layout Enumerate
9604 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9610 arg "depth-increment"
9614 Now, what happens if we nest an
9618 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9619 label be? An asterisk?
9623 \begin_layout Itemize
9633 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9634 So, its label is a bullet.
9635 (We got here by using
9638 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9644 arg "depth-increment"
9647 , then changing the environment to
9655 \begin_layout Itemize
9656 Here's level #4, produced using
9659 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9665 arg "depth-increment"
9669 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9674 \begin_layout Enumerate
9677 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9682 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9686 , because we are in the
9694 environment (that is, it is an
9709 \begin_layout Enumerate
9714 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9715 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9719 \begin_layout Enumerate
9720 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9723 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9726 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9729 \begin_layout Enumerate
9733 arg "depth-decrement"
9736 to decrease the depth after the next
9739 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9746 \begin_layout Enumerate
9748 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9753 \begin_layout Enumerate
9755 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9756 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9760 \begin_layout Enumerate
9761 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9770 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9775 reset the counter for the label.
9779 \begin_layout Enumerate
9783 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9789 arg "depth-decrement"
9792 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9793 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9794 into the twofold-nested
9802 \begin_layout Enumerate
9803 The same thing happens if we do another
9806 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9812 arg "depth-decrement"
9815 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9818 \begin_layout Standard
9819 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9824 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
9839 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
9846 The same rule applies for the
9850 environment, as well.
9853 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9854 Example 4: Going Bonkers
9857 \begin_layout Enumerate
9858 We're going to go totally nuts now.
9859 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
9860 the same detail with how we did it.
9869 \begin_layout Standard
9877 arg "depth-increment"
9884 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
9885 the example in parentheses someplace.
9886 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
9887 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
9888 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
9892 \begin_layout Enumerate
9897 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
9902 Now we will add verse.
9903 \begin_inset Newline newline
9906 It will get much worse.
9907 \begin_inset Newline newline
9917 arg "depth-increment"
9928 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
9929 \begin_inset Newline newline
9932 Bippitey boppitey boo!
9933 \begin_inset Newline newline
9939 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9952 \begin_layout Standard
9953 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9959 \begin_layout Standard
9961 \begin_inset Tabular
9962 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9963 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9964 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9965 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
9970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10050 \begin_layout Verse
10054 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10064 arg "depth-increment"
10070 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10076 \begin_inset Newline newline
10084 arg "depth-decrement"
10091 \begin_layout Enumerate
10096 : level #1) This is another item.
10097 Note that selecting a
10101 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10102 3 times to put the table inside the
10110 \begin_layout Quotation
10111 We're now ending the
10115 list and changing to
10120 We're still at level #1.
10121 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10122 The next set of paragraphs is a
10123 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10127 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10130 We will nest both the
10137 \begin_inset space ~
10142 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10146 for the letter body.
10150 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10153 to preserve the depth.
10154 Remember that you need to use
10157 arg "newline-insert newline"
10160 to create multiple lines inside the
10167 \begin_inset space ~
10177 \begin_layout Right Address
10179 \begin_inset Newline newline
10182 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10183 \begin_inset Newline newline
10189 \begin_layout Address
10191 \begin_inset space ~
10197 \begin_layout Quotation
10198 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10199 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10202 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10203 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10204 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10205 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10206 as soon as possible.
10207 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10210 \begin_layout Quotation
10211 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10212 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10213 with your order, along with payment.
10216 \begin_layout Quotation
10217 We thank you again for your patience.
10220 \begin_layout Address
10222 \begin_inset Newline newline
10229 \begin_layout Quotation
10230 That ends that example!
10233 \begin_layout Standard
10234 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10235 gives you a lot of power with just
10237 We could have easily nested an
10258 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10261 \begin_layout Subsection
10263 \begin_inset Index idx
10266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10267 Nesting ! Separation
10273 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10275 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10282 \begin_layout Standard
10283 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10285 For example you need two different enumerations:
10288 \begin_layout Enumerate
10293 \begin_layout Enumerate
10298 \begin_layout Enumerate
10302 \begin_layout Standard
10303 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10309 \begin_layout Itemize
10315 \begin_layout Standard
10316 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10322 \begin_layout Enumerate
10326 \begin_layout Enumerate
10330 \begin_layout Enumerate
10334 \begin_layout Standard
10335 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10336 list item and use the menu
10338 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10339 Start New Environment
10342 This inserts a plain separator (red line in LyX) and behind it the new
10344 Alternatively set the cursor at the end of a list item and press
10347 arg "paragraph-break"
10351 This inserts a paragraph separator (red arrow in LyX).
10352 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10353 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10354 One can change the separator type by right-clicking on it.
10357 \begin_layout Standard
10358 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10361 arg "paragraph-break"
10364 in a Standard environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10367 \begin_layout Section
10368 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10369 \begin_inset Index idx
10372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10381 \begin_layout Standard
10382 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10383 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10385 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10386 be broken at the end of a line.
10387 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10391 \begin_layout Subsection
10393 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10395 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10400 \begin_inset Index idx
10403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10412 \begin_layout Standard
10413 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10414 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10415 ) not to break the line at
10417 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10420 \begin_layout Quote
10421 Further documentation is given in section
10422 \begin_inset Newline newline
10426 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10428 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10436 \begin_layout Standard
10437 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10438 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10442 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10446 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10450 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10452 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10457 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10461 A protected space is set with
10463 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10464 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10466 \begin_inset space ~
10474 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10480 \begin_layout Subsection
10482 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10484 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10489 \begin_inset Index idx
10492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10493 Spacing ! Horizontal
10501 \begin_layout Standard
10502 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10504 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10505 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10509 The length units are listed in Appendix
10510 \begin_inset space ~
10514 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10516 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10523 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10525 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10527 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10532 \begin_inset Index idx
10535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10536 Spaces ! Inter-word
10544 \begin_layout Standard
10545 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10546 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10547 at the ends of sentences.
10548 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10549 automatically takes care about this.
10550 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10551 followed by a period; see section
10552 \begin_inset space ~
10556 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10558 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10563 To insert a normal space, select
10565 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10566 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10568 \begin_inset space ~
10576 arg "space-insert normal"
10582 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10584 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10586 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10591 \begin_inset Index idx
10594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10603 \begin_layout Standard
10605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10612 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10613 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10617 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10621 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10622 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10623 inside abbreviations:
10626 \begin_layout Quote
10628 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10632 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10635 \begin_layout Standard
10636 or between values and units.
10637 Compare for example this:
10638 \begin_inset Newline newline
10642 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10646 \begin_inset Newline newline
10649 10 kg (normal space
10652 \begin_layout Standard
10653 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10655 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10656 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10658 \begin_inset space ~
10666 arg "space-insert thin"
10672 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10676 \begin_layout Standard
10677 You can also insert the following space types:
10680 \begin_layout Description
10682 \begin_inset space ~
10686 \begin_inset space ~
10689 space A line with a
10690 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10694 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10698 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10701 negative thin space between the arrows.
10704 \begin_layout Description
10706 \begin_inset space ~
10710 \begin_inset space ~
10713 space A line with a
10714 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10718 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10722 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10725 negative medium space between the arrows.
10728 \begin_layout Description
10730 \begin_inset space ~
10734 \begin_inset space ~
10737 space A line with a
10738 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10742 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10746 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10749 negative thick space between the arrows.
10752 \begin_layout Description
10754 \begin_inset space ~
10758 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10762 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10766 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10770 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10774 \begin_inset space ~
10778 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10781 em) space between the arrows.
10784 \begin_layout Description
10786 \begin_inset space ~
10790 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10794 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10798 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10802 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10806 \begin_inset space ~
10810 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10813 em) space between the arrows.
10816 \begin_layout Description
10818 \begin_inset space ~
10822 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10826 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10830 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
10834 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10838 \begin_inset space ~
10842 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10845 em) space between the arrows.
10848 \begin_layout Description
10850 \begin_inset space ~
10854 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10858 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
10863 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10867 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10870 cm space between the arrows.
10873 \begin_layout Standard
10875 \begin_inset space ~
10879 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10881 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
10885 lists the different space sizes.
10888 \begin_layout Standard
10889 \begin_inset Float table
10894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10895 \begin_inset Caption Standard
10897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10898 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10900 name "tab:Width-of-the"
10904 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
10912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10914 \begin_inset Tabular
10915 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
10916 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10917 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10918 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10958 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10982 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11006 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11030 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11034 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11038 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11062 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11086 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11101 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11114 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11129 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11142 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11157 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11170 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11191 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11193 \begin_inset Index idx
11196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11205 \begin_layout Standard
11206 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11207 feature for adding extra space
11208 in a uniform fashion.
11209 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11210 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11211 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11212 equally between themselves.
11215 \begin_layout Standard
11216 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11219 \begin_layout Quote
11221 This is on the left side
11222 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11225 This is on the right
11228 \begin_layout Quote
11231 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11235 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11241 \begin_layout Quote
11244 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11248 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11252 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11258 \begin_layout Standard
11259 That was an example in the
11265 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11269 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11273 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11276 is one in a standard paragraph.
11277 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11281 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11284 \begin_layout Standard
11285 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11288 \begin_inset space ~
11293 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11296 \begin_layout Standard
11298 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11302 \begin_inset space ~
11308 \begin_layout Standard
11310 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11314 \begin_inset space ~
11320 \begin_layout Standard
11322 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11326 \begin_inset space ~
11332 \begin_layout Standard
11334 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11338 \begin_inset space ~
11344 \begin_layout Standard
11346 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11350 \begin_inset space ~
11356 \begin_layout Standard
11358 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11362 \begin_inset space ~
11368 \begin_layout Standard
11369 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11377 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11381 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11383 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11384 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11388 option in the space dialog.
11396 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11398 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11400 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11405 \begin_inset Index idx
11408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11417 \begin_layout Standard
11418 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11419 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11422 \begin_layout Standard
11423 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11426 What is correct English?:
11427 \begin_inset Newline newline
11431 \begin_inset Newline newline
11435 \begin_inset space ~
11438 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11439 \begin_inset Newline newline
11443 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11454 \begin_inset Newline newline
11458 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11469 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11475 \begin_layout Standard
11477 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11482 \begin_inset space ~
11486 \begin_inset space ~
11490 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11494 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11496 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11497 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11501 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11503 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11507 \begin_inset space ~
11511 \begin_inset space ~
11515 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11518 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11519 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11523 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11527 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11528 That is why it is named
11529 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11533 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11537 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11538 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11542 \begin_layout Subsection
11544 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11546 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11551 \begin_inset Index idx
11554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11563 \begin_layout Standard
11564 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11566 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11567 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11569 \begin_inset space ~
11575 There you find the following sizes:
11578 \begin_layout Standard
11591 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11592 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11597 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11599 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11600 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11602 \begin_inset space ~
11608 \begin_inset Index idx
11611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11612 Document ! Settings
11617 for the paragraph separation.
11618 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11629 \begin_layout Standard
11635 \begin_inset Index idx
11638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11644 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11645 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11650 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11651 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11660 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11669 s are described in section
11670 \begin_inset space ~
11674 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11676 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11685 If there are several
11689 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11690 You can therefore use
11694 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11697 \begin_layout Standard
11702 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11703 \begin_inset space ~
11707 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11709 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11716 \begin_layout Standard
11717 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11727 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11728 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11740 \begin_layout Subsection
11741 Paragraph Alignment
11742 \begin_inset Index idx
11745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11746 Paragraph ! Alignment
11754 \begin_layout Standard
11755 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11757 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11760 dialog (toolbar button
11763 arg "layout-paragraph"
11767 There are five possibilities:
11770 \begin_layout Itemize
11778 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11784 \begin_layout Itemize
11792 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11798 \begin_layout Itemize
11806 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11812 \begin_layout Itemize
11820 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
11826 \begin_layout Itemize
11834 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
11840 \begin_layout Standard
11841 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
11842 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
11843 the left and right margins.
11844 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
11847 \begin_layout Standard
11849 This paragraph is right aligned,
11852 \begin_layout Standard
11854 this one is centered,
11857 \begin_layout Standard
11859 this one is left aligned.
11862 \begin_layout Subsection
11864 \begin_inset Index idx
11867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11868 Page breaks ! Forced
11874 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11876 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
11883 \begin_layout Standard
11884 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
11885 does the page breaks in your document, you can
11886 force a page break where you want one.
11887 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
11888 is good at page breaking.
11889 Only if you use a lot of
11893 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
11894 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
11897 \begin_layout Standard
11898 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
11899 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
11903 have to change the page breaking.
11906 \begin_layout Standard
11907 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
11909 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
11911 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11912 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11914 \begin_inset space ~
11920 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
11922 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11923 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11925 \begin_inset space ~
11930 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
11932 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
11933 on which only the last few lines are absent.
11936 \begin_layout Standard
11937 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
11938 at the top of a page.
11939 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
11941 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
11942 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
11943 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
11945 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11947 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
11951 to learn more about
11958 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11960 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11962 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
11967 \begin_inset Index idx
11970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11971 Page breaks ! Clear
11979 \begin_layout Standard
11980 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
11981 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
11982 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
11983 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
11984 it, if necessary by adding pages.
11987 \begin_layout Standard
11988 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
11990 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11991 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11993 \begin_inset space ~
11999 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12001 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12002 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12004 \begin_inset space ~
12008 \begin_inset space ~
12013 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12014 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12017 \begin_layout Subsection
12019 \begin_inset Index idx
12022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12029 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12031 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12038 \begin_layout Standard
12039 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12041 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12043 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12044 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12046 \begin_inset space ~
12050 \begin_inset space ~
12058 arg "newline-insert newline"
12062 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12064 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12065 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12067 \begin_inset space ~
12071 \begin_inset space ~
12079 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12082 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12084 This is useful to avoid
12085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12089 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12092 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12095 \begin_layout Standard
12096 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12097 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12099 very good at line breaking.
12100 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessaryactively
12101 to set a line break, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12102 \begin_inset space ~
12106 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12108 reference "sec:Quote"
12113 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12115 reference "sec:Verse"
12120 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12122 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12129 \begin_layout Subsection
12131 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12133 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12138 \begin_inset Index idx
12141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12150 \begin_layout Standard
12152 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12163 \begin_layout Standard
12167 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12168 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12170 \begin_inset space ~
12175 you can insert horizontal lines.
12176 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12177 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12178 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12181 \begin_layout Standard
12183 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12194 \begin_layout Section
12195 Characters and Symbols
12198 \begin_layout Standard
12199 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12200 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12201 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12203 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12207 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12209 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12213 for information on how this is done.
12216 \begin_layout Standard
12217 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12222 dialog via the menu
12224 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12225 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12231 \begin_layout Standard
12232 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12240 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12241 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12243 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12251 \begin_layout Section
12252 Fonts and Text Styles
12253 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12255 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12262 \begin_layout Subsection
12264 \begin_inset Index idx
12267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12276 \begin_layout Standard
12277 There are two types of fonts:
12280 \begin_layout Description
12282 \begin_inset space ~
12286 \begin_inset Index idx
12289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12295 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12296 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12300 characters) in the font.
12301 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12302 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12303 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12304 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12305 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12306 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12307 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12308 \begin_inset Newline newline
12311 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12312 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12313 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12314 sizes than at small ones.
12315 \begin_inset Newline newline
12329 \begin_inset space ~
12337 \begin_layout Description
12339 \begin_inset space ~
12343 \begin_inset Index idx
12346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12352 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12353 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12354 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12355 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12356 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12357 image manipulation program.
12358 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12359 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12360 \begin_inset space ~
12363 pixels high up to 34
12364 \begin_inset space ~
12367 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12368 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12369 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12371 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12372 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12373 \begin_inset Newline newline
12376 Bitmap fonts are named
12379 \begin_inset space ~
12384 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12387 \begin_layout Standard
12388 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12389 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12390 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12391 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12392 use scalable fonts.
12395 \begin_layout Standard
12396 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12399 \begin_layout Standard
12400 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12401 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12402 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12403 font to emphasize text, you use an
12404 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12412 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12414 In \SpecialChar LyX
12415 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12419 \begin_layout Subsection
12422 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12424 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12431 \begin_layout Standard
12432 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12433 used its own fonts.
12434 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12435 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12438 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12439 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12440 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12441 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12442 to a word processor.
12443 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12444 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12445 files are very portable across
12446 different machines.
12447 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12448 has increased a lot
12449 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12452 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12454 \begin_inset space ~
12458 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12460 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12465 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12466 code in the document
12467 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12470 \begin_layout Standard
12471 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12472 engines that are also able directly
12473 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12475 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12477 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12479 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12480 that is installed on your system.
12481 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12484 \begin_layout Standard
12485 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12493 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12494 es; so you might have to experiment.
12502 \begin_layout Standard
12503 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12512 and especially Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12513 , are still rather new and thus not as mature as tradition
12514 al \SpecialChar LaTeX
12515 or PDF\SpecialChar TeX
12524 \begin_layout Subsection
12525 Document Font and Font size
12526 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12528 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12533 \begin_inset Index idx
12536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12543 \begin_inset Index idx
12546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12555 \begin_layout Standard
12556 You can set the document fonts in the
12558 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12562 \begin_inset Index idx
12565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12566 Document ! Settings
12576 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12577 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12580 \begin_inset space ~
12589 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12591 \begin_inset space ~
12594 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12597 \begin_layout Standard
12602 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12603 This requires that you use
12615 as the output format, i.
12616 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12620 \begin_inset space \space{}
12623 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12624 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12625 installed (see section
12626 \begin_inset space ~
12630 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12632 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12637 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12639 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12640 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12642 \begin_inset space ~
12645 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12646 cannot determine the family.
12647 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12648 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12651 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12654 \begin_layout Standard
12655 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12656 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12661 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12667 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12668 In most cases, this will be the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12670 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12676 \begin_inset space ~
12682 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12695 European Computer Modern
12698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12705 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12708 \begin_layout Standard
12717 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12718 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12723 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12726 \begin_inset space ~
12731 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12737 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12738 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12741 \begin_layout Itemize
12745 \begin_inset space ~
12750 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12763 \begin_inset space ~
12768 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12769 community in order to replace
12773 as the default font.
12774 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12775 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12778 \begin_inset space ~
12791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12792 One difference is improved kerning.
12800 \begin_layout Itemize
12804 \begin_inset space ~
12808 \begin_inset space ~
12813 fonts in (the rare) case that
12816 \begin_inset space ~
12821 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12836 Virtual means that it
12837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12841 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12848 -glyphs from other fonts.
12849 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
12851 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12855 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12859 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12863 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12871 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12877 \begin_inset Index idx
12880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12882 -packages ! aeguill
12887 with the document preamble line
12888 \begin_inset Newline newline
12895 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
12896 \begin_inset Newline newline
12901 will fix the guillemet problem.
12906 and that accented characters are not
12910 glyph, but built of
12914 characters, the accent and the letter.
12915 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
12921 If you search for example for the French word
12922 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12926 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12929 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
12931 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12935 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12938 and not for the glyph
12939 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12943 \begin_inset space ~
12947 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12953 \begin_layout Itemize
12954 If you do not like the look of
12962 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
12963 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12967 \begin_inset space ~
12973 \begin_inset space ~
12983 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
12984 \begin_inset space ~
12987 serif and typewriter fonts,
12991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12992 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
12993 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12999 \begin_inset space ~
13008 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13009 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13013 \begin_inset space \space{}
13021 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13025 \begin_inset space \space{}
13031 \begin_inset space ~
13039 \begin_inset space ~
13049 but you can also select your own.
13050 \begin_inset Newline newline
13053 The differences between roman,
13056 \begin_inset space ~
13065 fonts are explained in section
13066 \begin_inset space ~
13070 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13072 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13077 \begin_inset Newline newline
13083 \begin_inset space ~
13088 was originally designed for newspapers.
13089 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13090 into the small newspaper columns.
13094 \begin_inset space ~
13099 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13102 \begin_layout Standard
13103 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13116 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13121 depends on the class you are using.
13122 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13125 \begin_layout Standard
13126 Note that the font size is the
13131 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13132 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13133 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13134 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13137 \begin_inset space ~
13143 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13144 \begin_inset space ~
13148 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13150 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13157 \begin_layout Standard
13161 \begin_inset space ~
13166 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13168 \begin_inset space ~
13171 serif or typewriter.
13176 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13186 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13189 \begin_layout Standard
13194 LaTeX font encoding
13196 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13197 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13203 \begin_inset Index idx
13206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13208 -packages ! fontenc
13214 \begin_inset space ~
13218 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13220 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13225 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13226 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13233 \begin_layout Standard
13234 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13236 Use Old Style Figures
13240 Use True Small Caps
13243 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13246 Use Old Style Figures
13248 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13250 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13251 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13255 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13258 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13262 Use True Small Caps
13264 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13265 of scaled capitals.
13266 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13267 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13270 \begin_layout Standard
13275 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13276 a font to display the script characters.
13280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13281 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13287 \begin_inset Index idx
13290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13297 So this has no effect for the document language
13311 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13315 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13323 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13328 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13329 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13331 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13333 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13336 dialog, see section
13337 \begin_inset space ~
13341 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13343 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13355 \begin_layout Subsection
13359 \begin_layout Standard
13360 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13361 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13363 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13364 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13365 choose a math font in the dialog
13367 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13371 \begin_inset Index idx
13374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13375 Document ! Settings
13381 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13382 automatically selects a math font.
13383 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13384 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13387 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13393 \begin_inset space ~
13399 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13404 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13405 document font is available.
13408 \begin_layout Standard
13409 Note that the math font will not be used for
13413 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13419 or by the insertion of the command
13426 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13427 \begin_inset space ~
13431 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13432 while the math characters do not.
13434 \begin_inset space ~
13437 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13440 \begin_inset space ~
13448 \begin_inset space ~
13453 in the document font settings.
13456 \begin_layout Standard
13457 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13458 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13459 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13460 font (in most cases
13461 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13467 \begin_inset space ~
13473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13476 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13477 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13485 \begin_inset space ~
13491 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13497 \begin_layout Subsection
13498 Using Different Character Styles
13499 \begin_inset Index idx
13502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13509 \begin_inset Index idx
13512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13521 \begin_layout Standard
13522 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13523 automatically changes the character style for certain
13524 paragraph environments.
13526 supports two character styles,
13535 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13539 \begin_layout Standard
13544 style, do one of the following:
13547 \begin_layout Itemize
13548 click on the toolbar button
13557 \begin_layout Itemize
13558 use the key binding
13567 \begin_layout Standard
13568 These commands are all toggles.
13573 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13576 \begin_layout Standard
13577 One typically uses the
13581 style for proper names.
13583 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13590 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13598 \begin_layout Standard
13599 A more widely used character style is the
13604 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13611 \begin_layout Itemize
13612 clicking on the toolbar button
13621 \begin_layout Itemize
13622 using the keybindings
13631 \begin_layout Standard
13636 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13638 use a different font.
13641 \begin_layout Standard
13642 We've been using the
13646 style all over the place in this document.
13647 Here's one more example:
13650 \begin_layout Quotation
13653 Do not overuse character styles!
13656 \begin_layout Standard
13657 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13658 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13659 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13660 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13664 \begin_layout Standard
13665 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13673 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13675 \begin_inset space ~
13678 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13684 arg "dialog-show character"
13690 \begin_layout Subsection
13691 Fine-Tuning with the
13696 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13698 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13703 \begin_inset Index idx
13706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13715 \begin_layout Standard
13716 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13718 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13719 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13720 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13721 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13722 from ordinary dialog.
13725 \begin_layout Standard
13726 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13727 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13728 \begin_inset Newline newline
13731 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13732 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13735 \begin_layout Standard
13736 To use custom character styles, open the
13738 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13740 \begin_inset space ~
13743 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13746 dialog or press the toolbar button
13749 arg "dialog-show character"
13753 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13754 font property that you can choose.
13755 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13758 \begin_inset space ~
13763 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13768 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13769 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13770 environments all at once.
13773 \begin_layout Standard
13774 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13777 \begin_inset space ~
13789 \begin_layout Labeling
13790 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13796 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13800 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13804 The possible options are:
13808 \begin_layout Labeling
13809 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13814 This is the Roman font family.
13815 Normally a serif font.
13816 It's also the default family.
13826 \begin_layout Labeling
13827 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13831 \begin_inset space ~
13838 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13850 \begin_layout Labeling
13851 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13858 This is the Typewriter font family.
13864 arg "font-typewriter"
13873 \begin_layout Labeling
13874 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13879 This corresponds to the print weight.
13884 \begin_layout Labeling
13885 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13890 This is the Medium font series.
13891 It's also the default series.
13894 \begin_layout Labeling
13895 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13902 This is the Bold font series.
13915 \begin_layout Labeling
13916 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13921 As the name implies.
13926 \begin_layout Labeling
13927 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13932 This is the Upright font shape.
13933 It's also the default shape.
13936 \begin_layout Labeling
13937 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13951 s the Italic font shape
13957 \begin_layout Labeling
13958 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13965 This is the Slanted font shape
13967 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
13968 , this is different from italic).
13971 \begin_layout Labeling
13972 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13976 \begin_inset space ~
13983 This is the Small caps font shape
13990 \begin_layout Labeling
13991 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13996 Alters the text color.
13997 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14001 \begin_inset space ~
14006 , which means that the document default color set in
14008 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14009 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14015 \begin_inset space ~
14020 is used, you can choose between
14053 \begin_inset Index idx
14056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14065 \begin_layout Labeling
14066 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14071 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14072 the language of the document.
14073 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14074 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14076 \begin_inset Newline newline
14079 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14081 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14082 When using the spell checking (see section
14083 \begin_inset space ~
14087 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14089 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14093 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14096 \begin_layout Labeling
14097 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14102 Alters the size of the font.
14103 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14104 proportional to the document font size.
14105 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14106 the details, but a general description of what
14112 \begin_layout Labeling
14113 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14121 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14125 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14134 arg "font-size tiny"
14140 \begin_layout Labeling
14141 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14149 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14153 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14162 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14168 \begin_layout Labeling
14169 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14177 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14181 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14190 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14196 \begin_layout Labeling
14197 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14205 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14209 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14218 arg "font-size small"
14224 \begin_layout Labeling
14225 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14231 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14239 It's also the default size.
14243 arg "font-size normal"
14249 \begin_layout Labeling
14250 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14258 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14262 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14271 arg "font-size large"
14277 \begin_layout Labeling
14278 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14286 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14290 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14299 arg "font-size larger"
14305 \begin_layout Labeling
14306 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14327 arg "font-size largest"
14333 \begin_layout Labeling
14334 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14342 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14346 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14355 arg "font-size huge"
14361 \begin_layout Labeling
14362 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14370 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14374 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14383 arg "font-size giant"
14389 \begin_layout Labeling
14390 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14395 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14404 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14415 arg "font-size increase"
14421 \begin_layout Labeling
14422 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14427 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14436 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14440 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14447 arg "font-size decrease"
14454 \begin_layout Standard
14459 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14460 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14462 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14463 — use those instead.
14464 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14467 \begin_layout Labeling
14468 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14473 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14478 \begin_layout Labeling
14479 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14486 This is text with emphasize on
14489 This might seem like the same as
14493 , but it is actually a bit different.
14499 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14501 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14504 \begin_layout Labeling
14505 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14512 This is text with Underbar on.
14518 arg "font-underline"
14524 \begin_inset Newline newline
14529 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14530 when you could not change fonts.
14531 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14532 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14533 because some people
14537 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14540 \begin_layout Labeling
14541 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14545 \begin_inset space ~
14552 This is text with Double underbar on.
14558 arg "font-underunderline"
14562 \begin_inset Newline newline
14565 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14566 about double underbar.
14569 \begin_layout Labeling
14570 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14574 \begin_inset space ~
14581 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14587 arg "font-underwave"
14591 \begin_inset Newline newline
14594 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14595 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14598 \begin_layout Labeling
14599 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14606 This is text with Strikeout on.
14612 arg "font-strikeout"
14616 \begin_inset Newline newline
14619 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14620 changed in the meantime.
14623 \begin_layout Labeling
14624 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14631 This is text with Noun on.
14638 , this is a logical attribute.
14639 Normally it's equivalent to
14642 \begin_inset space ~
14651 \begin_layout Standard
14652 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14653 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14655 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14657 \begin_inset space ~
14660 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14666 arg "dialog-show character"
14669 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14670 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14673 arg "textstyle-apply"
14677 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14681 \begin_layout Standard
14682 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14689 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14690 (suppose you just set the shape to
14691 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14699 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14703 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14709 \begin_inset space ~
14721 \begin_layout Standard
14722 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14730 \begin_inset space ~
14742 \begin_layout Itemize
14748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14755 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14756 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14760 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14764 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14773 \begin_inset Newline newline
14777 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14791 \begin_inset Note Note
14794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14795 For more on phantoms see section
14796 \begin_inset space ~
14800 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14802 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
14812 \begin_inset Newline newline
14818 \begin_layout Itemize
14823 fonts use characters with serifs.
14824 These are the small
14825 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14829 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14832 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14833 The following example shows the difference:
14834 \begin_inset Newline newline
14838 \begin_inset Newline newline
14843 text without serifs
14846 \begin_inset Newline newline
14849 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14850 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14857 \begin_layout Itemize
14862 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14863 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14864 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14867 \begin_layout Standard
14868 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14872 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14875 refers to applying or removing font properties.
14876 When a property is marked for toggling in the
14879 \begin_inset space ~
14884 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
14885 the property to be removed.
14886 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
14887 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
14888 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
14891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14906 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
14907 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
14908 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14912 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14915 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
14919 \begin_inset space ~
14924 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
14927 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14931 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14935 If you, for example, set
14936 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14940 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14948 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14954 \begin_inset space ~
14959 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
14961 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14965 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14968 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
14971 \begin_layout Standard
14972 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
14973 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
14976 \begin_layout Section
14977 Printing and Previewing
14980 \begin_layout Subsection
14984 \begin_layout Standard
14985 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
14986 using \SpecialChar LyX
14987 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
14988 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
14989 goes on behind-the-scenes.
14990 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
14992 Additional Features
14997 \begin_layout Standard
14999 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15002 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15003 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15004 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15007 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15008 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15009 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15010 to turn your writing into printable output.
15011 This happens in two stages:
15014 \begin_layout Enumerate
15015 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15016 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15018 a file with the extension,
15019 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15033 \begin_layout Enumerate
15034 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15035 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15036 to use the commands in the
15040 file to produce printable output.
15043 \begin_layout Subsection
15044 Output file formats
15045 \begin_inset Index idx
15048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15055 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15057 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15064 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15065 Simple text (ASCII)
15066 \begin_inset Index idx
15069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15070 File formats ! ASCII
15078 \begin_layout Standard
15079 This file type has the extension
15080 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15088 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15092 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15093 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15096 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15097 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15103 \begin_layout Standard
15104 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15106 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15107 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15109 \begin_inset space ~
15115 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15116 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15117 bibliography (section
15118 \begin_inset space ~
15122 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15124 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15129 If your document includes such material, use
15131 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15132 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15134 \begin_inset space ~
15138 \begin_inset space ~
15142 \begin_inset space ~
15150 \begin_inset space ~
15154 \begin_inset space ~
15160 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15161 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15164 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15167 \begin_inset Index idx
15170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15171 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15180 \begin_layout Standard
15181 This file type has the extension
15182 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15190 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15193 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15196 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15197 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15198 -Errors or to process it manually
15199 with console commands.
15200 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15201 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15202 's temporary directory whenever you
15203 view or export your document.
15206 \begin_layout Standard
15207 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15208 -file using the menu
15210 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15211 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15215 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15216 export variants are explained in section
15217 \begin_inset space ~
15221 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15223 reference "subsec:Export"
15230 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15232 \begin_inset Index idx
15235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15244 \begin_layout Standard
15245 This file type has the extension
15246 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15254 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15259 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15263 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15266 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15267 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15268 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15272 \begin_layout Standard
15273 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15274 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15275 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15276 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15277 when you view the DVI.
15278 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15281 \begin_layout Standard
15282 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15284 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15285 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15290 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15291 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15293 \begin_inset space ~
15299 The latter option uses the program
15301 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15307 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15310 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15311 font access (see section
15312 \begin_inset space ~
15316 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15318 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15323 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15324 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15329 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15331 \begin_inset Index idx
15334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15335 File formats ! PostScript
15343 \begin_layout Standard
15344 This file type has the extension
15345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15357 PostScript was developed by the company
15361 as a printer language.
15362 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15364 PostScript can be seen as a
15365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15368 programming language
15369 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15372 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15377 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15384 \begin_inset Index idx
15387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15389 -packages ! pstricks
15399 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15402 \begin_layout Standard
15403 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15404 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15407 Encapsulated PostScript
15408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15411 (EPS, file extension
15412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15424 As \SpecialChar LyX
15425 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15426 convert them in the background to EPS.
15427 If, for example, you have 50
15428 \begin_inset space ~
15431 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15433 \begin_inset space ~
15436 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15437 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15439 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15440 EPS to avoid this problem.
15443 \begin_layout Standard
15444 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15446 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15447 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15453 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15455 \begin_inset Index idx
15458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15465 \begin_inset Index idx
15468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15477 \begin_layout Standard
15478 This file type has the extension
15479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15492 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15495 Portable Document Format
15496 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15503 was derived from PostScript.
15504 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15513 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15514 looks exactly the same.
15517 \begin_layout Standard
15518 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15519 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15522 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15523 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15526 (JPG, file extension
15527 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15539 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15547 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15554 Portable Network Graphics
15555 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15558 (PNG, file extension
15559 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15571 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15572 converts them in the
15573 background to one of these formats.
15574 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15575 will slow down your workflow.
15576 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15579 \begin_layout Standard
15580 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15582 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15588 \begin_layout Description
15590 \begin_inset space ~
15593 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15597 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15600 \begin_layout Description
15602 \begin_inset space ~
15609 ) This uses the program
15611 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15614 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15617 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15620 is a new engine, derived from
15624 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15625 access (see section
15626 \begin_inset space ~
15630 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15632 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15637 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15638 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15643 \begin_layout Description
15645 \begin_inset space ~
15652 ) This uses the program
15657 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15663 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15664 font access (see section
15665 \begin_inset space ~
15669 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15671 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15676 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15677 vertically written Japanese.
15680 \begin_layout Description
15682 \begin_inset space ~
15685 (cropped) This is the same as
15688 \begin_inset space ~
15693 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15694 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15695 to generate good-looking
15696 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15699 \begin_layout Description
15701 \begin_inset space ~
15704 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15708 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15712 \begin_layout Description
15714 \begin_inset space ~
15717 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15721 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15722 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15726 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15727 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15730 \begin_layout Standard
15734 \begin_inset space ~
15743 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15744 works without problems.
15745 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15746 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15750 \begin_inset space ~
15758 \begin_inset space ~
15763 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15771 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15773 \begin_inset Index idx
15776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15777 FileFormats ! XHTML
15783 \begin_inset Index idx
15786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15795 \begin_layout Standard
15796 This file type has the extension
15797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15809 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15810 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
15811 When \SpecialChar LyX
15812 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15813 suitable for the purpose.
15814 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15816 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15817 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15820 between different formats, which are described in section
15822 Math Output in XHTML
15827 \begin_inset space ~
15835 \begin_layout Standard
15836 XHTML output remains
15837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15841 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15844 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
15845 features are supported yet.
15849 and the World Wide Web
15853 Additional Features
15855 manual, for more information.
15858 \begin_layout Standard
15859 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15861 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15862 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15868 \begin_layout Subsection
15870 \begin_inset Index idx
15873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15882 \begin_layout Standard
15883 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
15884 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
15893 or use the toolbar button
15900 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
15901 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
15902 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15906 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15908 reference "sec:File-Formats"
15912 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
15914 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15918 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15920 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
15925 Further output formats can be selected via
15927 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15928 View (Other Formats)
15930 or the toolbar button
15931 \begin_inset Graphics
15932 filename ../images/view-others.png
15934 groupId toolbarbuttons
15941 \begin_layout Standard
15942 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
15943 viewer window using the menu
15945 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15950 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15951 Update (Other Formats)
15956 \begin_layout Standard
15957 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
15960 To have a real output, export your document.
15963 \begin_layout Section
15964 A few Words about Typography
15965 \begin_inset Index idx
15968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15977 \begin_layout Subsection
15978 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
15979 \begin_inset Index idx
15982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15989 \begin_inset Index idx
15992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16001 \begin_layout Standard
16002 In \SpecialChar LyX
16004 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16012 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16015 character comes in four lengths: the
16027 , and the minus sign:
16028 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16034 \begin_layout Standard
16035 \begin_inset Tabular
16036 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16037 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16038 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16039 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16040 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16041 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16070 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16093 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16110 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16135 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16137 \begin_inset space ~
16140 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16147 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16172 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16174 \begin_inset space ~
16177 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16198 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16210 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16218 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16232 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16238 \begin_layout Standard
16239 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16240 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16251 character multiple times in a row.
16252 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16253 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
16256 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16260 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16268 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16272 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16276 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16280 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16286 \begin_layout Standard
16287 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16288 math mode and has a length of its own.
16289 Here are some examples:
16292 \begin_layout Enumerate
16293 line- and page-breaks
16294 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16304 \begin_layout Enumerate
16306 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16316 \begin_layout Enumerate
16317 Oh — there's a dash.
16318 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16328 \begin_layout Enumerate
16329 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16333 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16343 \begin_layout Subsection
16345 \begin_inset Index idx
16348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16355 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16357 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16364 \begin_layout Standard
16365 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16366 but automatically in the output.
16367 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16373 \begin_inset Index idx
16376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16383 following the rules of the document language.
16386 \begin_layout Standard
16388 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16392 font and with unusual constructs, like
16393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16401 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16402 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16403 This is done with the menu
16405 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16406 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16408 \begin_inset space ~
16414 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16416 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16420 \begin_layout Standard
16421 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16422 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16428 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16433 would then see the hyphen
16434 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16438 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16441 as a hyphenation possibility.
16442 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16443 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16444 as described in section
16445 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16448 Prevent Hyphenation
16449 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16455 \begin_inset space ~
16463 \begin_layout Subsection
16465 \begin_inset Index idx
16468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16477 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16478 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16479 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16481 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
16488 \begin_layout Standard
16489 When \SpecialChar LyX
16490 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16491 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16493 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16499 appropriate amount of space.
16500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16503 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16505 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16506 gets after another word.
16509 \begin_layout Standard
16510 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16511 not work in all cases.
16513 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16524 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16525 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16528 \begin_layout Standard
16529 Here are some examples of
16533 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16536 \begin_layout Itemize
16541 \begin_layout Itemize
16546 \begin_layout Standard
16547 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16550 \begin_layout Itemize
16552 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16556 this is too much space!
16559 \begin_layout Itemize
16564 \begin_layout Standard
16565 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16568 \begin_layout Standard
16569 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16572 \begin_layout Enumerate
16576 \begin_inset space ~
16581 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16582 \begin_inset space ~
16586 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16588 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
16593 \begin_inset Index idx
16596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16597 Spaces ! inter-word
16605 \begin_layout Enumerate
16609 \begin_inset space ~
16614 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16615 \begin_inset space ~
16619 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16621 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
16626 \begin_inset Index idx
16629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16638 \begin_layout Enumerate
16642 \begin_inset space ~
16646 \begin_inset space ~
16650 \begin_inset space ~
16657 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16659 \begin_inset space ~
16664 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16665 This function is also bound to
16668 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16674 \begin_layout Standard
16675 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16678 \begin_layout Itemize
16680 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16684 \begin_inset space \space{}
16687 this is too much space!
16690 \begin_layout Itemize
16691 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
16695 \begin_layout Standard
16696 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16697 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
16699 will take care of this.
16702 \begin_layout Standard
16703 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16707 \begin_inset space ~
16713 feature described in the section
16715 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
16720 Additional Features
16725 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16727 \begin_inset Index idx
16730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16731 Typography ! Quotes
16737 \begin_inset Index idx
16740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16771 \begin_layout Standard
16773 usually sets quotes correctly.
16774 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16775 and use a closing quote at the end.
16777 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16781 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16785 The keyboard character,
16789 , generates this automatically.
16792 \begin_layout Standard
16793 You can specify what character the
16797 key produces using the submenu
16803 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16807 \begin_inset Index idx
16810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16811 Document ! Settings
16821 There are six choices:
16824 \begin_layout Labeling
16825 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16842 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16848 \begin_layout Labeling
16849 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16852 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16856 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16862 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16866 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16872 \begin_layout Labeling
16873 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16876 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16880 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16886 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16890 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16896 \begin_layout Labeling
16897 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16900 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16904 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16910 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16914 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16920 \begin_layout Labeling
16921 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16924 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16928 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16934 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16938 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16944 \begin_layout Labeling
16945 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16948 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16952 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16958 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16962 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16968 \begin_layout Standard
16969 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
16972 arg "quote-insert single"
16978 \begin_layout Subsection
16980 \begin_inset Index idx
16983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16984 Typography ! Ligatures
16990 \begin_inset Index idx
16993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17022 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17024 name "subsec:Ligatures"
17031 \begin_layout Standard
17032 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
17033 print them as single characters.
17034 These groups are known as
17039 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
17040 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
17042 Here are the standard ligatures:
17045 \begin_layout Itemize
17049 \begin_layout Itemize
17053 \begin_layout Itemize
17057 \begin_layout Itemize
17061 \begin_layout Itemize
17065 \begin_layout Standard
17066 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
17069 \begin_layout Standard
17070 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
17071 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
17072 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17076 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17079 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
17080 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17084 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17092 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17095 To break a ligature, use
17097 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17098 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17100 \begin_inset space ~
17107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17118 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17124 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17128 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17132 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17135 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17137 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17143 \begin_layout Subsection
17145 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
17147 \begin_inset Index idx
17150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17158 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17160 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
17167 \begin_layout Standard
17170 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17174 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
17177 \begin_layout Description
17179 The name of the game.
17182 \begin_layout Description
17184 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
17188 \begin_layout Description
17190 The \SpecialChar TeX
17191 macro colletion used by \SpecialChar LyX
17195 \begin_layout Description
17196 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
17197 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17201 \begin_layout Standard
17202 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17204 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17208 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
17212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17216 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
17217 world to give programs geek version numbers.
17218 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
17219 converges to the number
17220 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
17223 : The actual version is
17224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17229 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17232 , the previous one was
17233 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17244 \begin_layout Subsection
17246 \begin_inset Index idx
17249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17258 \begin_layout Standard
17259 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
17260 space between two words.
17261 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
17264 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17271 for units use the menu
17273 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17274 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17276 \begin_inset space ~
17284 arg "space-insert thin"
17290 \begin_layout Standard
17291 Here is an example to show the differences:
17294 \begin_layout Standard
17295 \begin_inset Tabular
17296 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
17297 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17298 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17299 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17306 \begin_inset space ~
17310 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17322 space between number and unit
17329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17334 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17338 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17350 half space between number and unit
17363 \begin_layout Subsection
17365 \begin_inset Index idx
17368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17369 Typography ! Widows and orphans
17377 \begin_layout Standard
17378 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
17380 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
17381 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
17382 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
17383 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
17384 These bits of text became known as
17395 \begin_layout Standard
17396 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
17397 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
17398 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
17399 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
17400 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
17401 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
17402 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
17403 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
17404 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
17405 \begin_inset Newline newline
17413 \begin_inset Newline newline
17421 \begin_inset Newline newline
17424 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17425 preamble of your document to avoid them.
17426 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
17428 \begin_inset space ~
17432 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17434 key "latexcompanion"
17439 \begin_inset space ~
17443 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17449 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17450 's page break mechanism.
17453 \begin_layout Chapter
17454 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
17455 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17457 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
17464 \begin_layout Standard
17465 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
17468 \begin_inset space ~
17474 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
17477 \begin_layout Section
17479 \begin_inset Index idx
17482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17489 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17498 \begin_layout Standard
17500 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
17503 \begin_layout Description
17506 \begin_inset space ~
17509 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
17510 \begin_inset Newline newline
17514 \begin_inset Note Note
17517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17518 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
17526 \begin_layout Description
17527 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
17528 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
17529 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17532 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17533 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17535 \begin_inset space ~
17541 \begin_inset Newline newline
17545 \begin_inset Note Comment
17548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17549 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
17558 \begin_layout Description
17560 \begin_inset space ~
17563 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
17564 set in the document settings under
17566 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
17568 \begin_inset space ~
17574 \begin_inset Newline newline
17578 \begin_inset Newline newline
17582 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
17585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17591 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
17592 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
17597 of a comment that appears in the output.
17603 \begin_inset Newline newline
17607 \begin_inset Newline newline
17610 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17613 \begin_layout Standard
17614 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17622 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17626 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
17629 \begin_layout Section
17631 \begin_inset Index idx
17634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17641 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17643 name "sec:Footnotes"
17650 \begin_layout Standard
17652 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
17655 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17658 or the toolbar button
17661 arg "footnote-insert"
17673 \begin_inset Graphics
17674 filename clipart/footnoteQt4.png
17683 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
17684 's representation of your footnote.
17694 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17713 label, the box will
17717 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17718 Clicking on the box label again will close
17731 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17732 and click on the footnote
17747 \begin_layout Standard
17748 Here is an example footnote:
17756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17757 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17765 \begin_layout Standard
17766 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17767 position where the footnote box is placed.
17768 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17769 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
17770 according to the document class.
17772 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
17773 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
17779 ey are described in the
17782 \begin_inset space ~
17790 \begin_layout Section
17792 \begin_inset Index idx
17795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17802 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17804 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
17811 \begin_layout Standard
17812 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
17814 When you insert a margin note via the menu
17816 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17818 \begin_inset space ~
17823 or the toolbar button
17826 arg "marginalnote-insert"
17845 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17849 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17852 appearing within your text.
17853 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
17854 's representation of your margin
17863 \begin_layout Standard
17864 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
17868 \begin_inset Marginal
17871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17873 This is a marginal note.
17881 \begin_layout Standard
17882 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
17883 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
17884 pages, right on odd pages.
17887 \begin_layout Standard
17888 For further information about marginal notes see the section
17891 \begin_inset space ~
17899 \begin_inset space ~
17907 \begin_layout Section
17908 Graphics and Images
17909 \begin_inset Index idx
17912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17919 \begin_inset Index idx
17922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17929 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17931 name "sec:Graphics"
17938 \begin_layout Standard
17939 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
17940 you want and click on the toolbar icon
17943 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
17948 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17952 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
17955 \begin_layout Standard
17956 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
17961 tab allows you to choose your image file.
17962 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
17964 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
17965 \begin_inset space ~
17969 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17971 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
17978 \begin_layout Standard
17983 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
17984 of the image in the output.
17985 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
17989 \begin_inset space ~
17993 \begin_inset space ~
18002 \begin_inset space ~
18006 \begin_inset space ~
18010 \begin_inset space ~
18015 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
18016 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
18024 \begin_layout Standard
18028 \begin_inset space ~
18032 \begin_inset space ~
18037 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
18038 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
18040 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
18045 \begin_inset space ~
18050 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
18051 with the image size is printed.
18054 \begin_layout Standard
18055 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
18056 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
18058 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
18061 \begin_layout Standard
18063 \begin_inset Graphics
18064 filename clipart/mobius.eps
18072 \begin_layout Standard
18073 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
18074 the image into a float, see section
18075 \begin_inset space ~
18079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18081 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
18088 \begin_layout Subsection
18090 \begin_inset Index idx
18093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18100 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18102 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
18109 \begin_layout Standard
18110 You can insert images in any known file format.
18111 But as we explained in section
18112 \begin_inset space ~
18116 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18118 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18122 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
18124 therefore uses the program
18128 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
18129 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
18130 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
18131 \begin_inset space ~
18135 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18137 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18144 \begin_layout Standard
18145 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
18148 \begin_layout Description
18150 \begin_inset space ~
18153 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
18154 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
18155 Well-known bitmap image formats are
18156 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18159 Graphics Interchange Format
18160 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18163 (GIF, file extension
18164 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18172 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18176 \begin_inset Index idx
18179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18211 Portable Network Graphics
18212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18215 (PNG, file extension
18216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18224 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18228 \begin_inset Index idx
18231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18263 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18267 (JPG, file extension
18268 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18288 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18292 \begin_inset Index idx
18295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18326 \begin_layout Description
18328 \begin_inset space ~
18331 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
18333 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
18334 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
18335 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
18336 \begin_inset Newline newline
18339 Scalable image formats can be
18340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18343 Scalable Vector Graphics
18344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18347 (SVG, file extension
18348 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18360 \begin_inset Index idx
18363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18392 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18395 Encapsulated PostScript
18396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18399 (EPS, file extension
18400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18412 \begin_inset Index idx
18415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18447 Portable Document Format
18448 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18451 (PDF, file extension
18452 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18464 \begin_inset Index idx
18467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18482 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
18483 result will not be scalable.
18484 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
18489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18490 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
18498 \begin_layout Standard
18499 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
18506 \begin_layout Subsection
18507 Grouping of Image Settings
18508 \begin_inset Index idx
18511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18512 Images ! Settings grouping
18520 \begin_layout Standard
18521 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
18523 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
18524 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
18526 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
18527 need to manually change each of them.
18531 \begin_layout Standard
18532 A new group can be set by pressing the button
18535 \begin_inset space ~
18539 \begin_inset space ~
18551 \begin_inset space ~
18555 \begin_inset space ~
18561 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
18562 and checking the name of the desired group.
18565 \begin_layout Section
18567 \begin_inset Index idx
18570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18577 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18586 \begin_layout Standard
18587 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
18590 arg "tabular-insert"
18595 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18599 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18600 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18601 from the rest of the table.
18602 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18603 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18605 Here is an example table:
18608 \begin_layout Standard
18610 \begin_inset Tabular
18611 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18612 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18613 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18614 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18615 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18616 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18816 \begin_layout Subsection
18820 \begin_layout Standard
18821 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
18824 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
18828 This brings up the table dialog.
18829 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
18830 cursor is placed currently.
18831 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
18832 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
18833 done on all of your selection.
18836 \begin_layout Standard
18837 In addition to the table dialog, the
18840 \begin_inset space ~
18845 helps you in setting table properties.
18846 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
18849 \begin_layout Standard
18853 \begin_inset space ~
18858 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
18859 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
18860 current cell respectively.
18861 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
18863 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
18864 of text, see section
18865 \begin_inset space ~
18869 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18871 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
18878 \begin_layout Standard
18879 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
18880 using the check box
18889 This will merge the cells to
18893 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
18894 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
18895 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
18896 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
18897 in the last row without the upper border:
18900 \begin_layout Standard
18902 \begin_inset Tabular
18903 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
18904 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
18905 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18906 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
18907 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18908 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18919 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18928 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19004 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19039 \begin_layout Standard
19040 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19041 -arguments for the table.
19042 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
19043 explained in the chapter
19050 \begin_inset space ~
19056 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
19057 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
19058 but are visible in the output.
19061 \begin_layout Standard
19062 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
19065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19070 Most DVI-viewers are
19074 able to display rotations.
19082 \begin_layout Standard
19087 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
19092 adds lines for all cell borders.
19095 \begin_layout Subsection
19097 \begin_inset Index idx
19100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19101 Tables ! Longtables
19107 \begin_inset Index idx
19110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19119 \begin_layout Standard
19120 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
19123 \begin_inset space ~
19127 \begin_inset space ~
19136 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
19137 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
19140 \begin_layout Description
19145 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19146 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
19147 except for the first page, if
19150 \begin_inset space ~
19158 \begin_layout Description
19162 \begin_inset space ~
19167 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19168 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
19171 \begin_layout Description
19176 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19177 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
19178 except for the last page, if
19181 \begin_inset space ~
19189 \begin_layout Description
19193 \begin_inset space ~
19198 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19199 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
19202 \begin_layout Description
19203 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
19204 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
19206 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19210 More about longtable captions can be found in the
19213 \begin_inset space ~
19221 \begin_layout Standard
19222 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
19223 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
19224 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
19230 In this context, first means first in this order:
19233 \begin_inset space ~
19245 \begin_inset space ~
19250 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
19253 \begin_layout Standard
19255 \begin_inset Tabular
19256 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
19257 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
19258 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
19259 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19260 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19261 <row endfirsthead="true">
19262 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19268 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
19273 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19282 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19292 <row endfirsthead="true">
19293 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19304 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19313 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19325 <row endhead="true">
19326 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19337 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19346 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19356 <row endhead="true">
19357 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19368 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19377 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19389 <row endfoot="true">
19390 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19401 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19410 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19441 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20382 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20391 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20400 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20411 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20442 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20473 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20504 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20535 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20566 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20597 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20628 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20659 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20690 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20721 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20752 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20783 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20814 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20845 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20876 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20907 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20938 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20969 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21000 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21031 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21062 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21093 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21124 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21155 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21186 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21217 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21248 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21279 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21310 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21341 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21371 <row endlastfoot="true">
21372 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21383 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21392 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21409 \begin_layout Subsection
21411 \begin_inset Index idx
21414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21421 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21423 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
21430 \begin_layout Standard
21431 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
21432 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
21433 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
21434 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
21438 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
21441 \begin_layout Standard
21442 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
21443 for the column in the table dialog.
21444 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
21445 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
21449 \begin_layout Standard
21451 \begin_inset Tabular
21452 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
21453 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21454 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21455 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
21456 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21476 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21545 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21601 This is longer now.
21606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21657 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21658 This is longer now.
21663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21689 \begin_layout Standard
21690 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21691 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
21695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21696 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
21697 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21703 Selection with the mouse or with
21707 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21708 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21709 the selection from outside the table.
21712 \begin_layout Section
21714 \begin_inset Index idx
21717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21724 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21733 \begin_layout Subsection
21737 \begin_layout Standard
21738 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21739 have a fixed location.
21741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21748 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21756 \begin_inset space ~
21761 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21762 too many notes on the current page.
21765 \begin_layout Standard
21766 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21767 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21768 and pages without text.
21769 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
21770 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
21771 Floats are therefore numbered.
21772 Referencing is described in section
21773 \begin_inset space ~
21777 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21779 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21786 \begin_layout Standard
21787 To insert a float, use the menu
21789 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21793 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21794 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21796 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21797 \begin_inset Index idx
21800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21806 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
21807 paragraph within the float.
21808 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
21809 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
21810 left-clicking on the box label.
21811 A closed float box looks like this:
21812 \begin_inset Graphics
21813 filename clipart/floatQt4.png
21818 – a gray button with a red label.
21821 \begin_layout Standard
21822 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
21824 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
21827 \begin_layout Subsection
21829 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21831 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
21836 \begin_inset Index idx
21839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21840 Floats ! Figure floats
21848 \begin_layout Standard
21850 \begin_inset space ~
21854 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21856 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21860 was created using the menu
21862 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21863 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
21869 arg "float-insert figure"
21873 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
21876 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21882 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21886 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
21887 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
21889 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
21891 \begin_inset space ~
21899 arg "layout-paragraph"
21905 \begin_layout Standard
21906 \begin_inset Float figure
21911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21913 \begin_inset Graphics
21914 filename clipart/platypus.eps
21923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21924 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21927 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21929 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21933 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
21946 \begin_layout Standard
21947 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
21948 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
21950 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21959 ) and refer to it using the menu
21961 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21967 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
21971 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
21972 vague references like
21973 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21977 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21980 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
21981 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
21983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21991 For more about cross-references, see section
21992 \begin_inset space ~
21996 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21998 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22005 \begin_layout Standard
22006 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
22007 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
22008 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
22009 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
22010 as described in section
22011 \begin_inset space ~
22015 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22017 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
22023 \begin_inset space ~
22027 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22029 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22033 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
22034 You can also set the images one below the other.
22036 \begin_inset space ~
22040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22042 reference "fig:Undefinable"
22047 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22049 reference "fig:Platypus"
22053 are the subfigures.
22056 \begin_layout Standard
22057 \begin_inset Float figure
22062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22063 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22067 \begin_inset Float figure
22072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22073 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22076 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22078 name "fig:Undefinable"
22090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22091 \begin_inset Graphics
22092 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
22103 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22107 \begin_inset Float figure
22112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22113 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22116 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22118 name "fig:Platypus"
22130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22131 \begin_inset Graphics
22132 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22144 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22151 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22154 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22156 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22160 Two distorted images.
22173 \begin_layout Subsection
22175 \begin_inset Index idx
22178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22179 Floats ! Table floats
22187 \begin_layout Standard
22188 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
22190 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22191 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22194 or the toolbar button
22197 arg "float-insert table"
22201 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
22202 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
22203 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
22205 \begin_inset space ~
22209 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22211 reference "tab:Table-float"
22218 \begin_layout Standard
22219 \begin_inset Float table
22224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22225 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22228 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22230 name "tab:Table-float"
22242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22244 \begin_inset Tabular
22245 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
22246 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22247 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22248 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22249 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22376 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
22384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22397 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22400 \end{array}\right]$
22408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22421 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
22442 \begin_layout Subsection
22444 \begin_inset Index idx
22447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22456 \begin_layout Standard
22458 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
22459 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
22460 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
22462 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
22470 \begin_inset space ~
22478 \begin_layout Section
22480 \begin_inset Index idx
22483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22492 \begin_layout Standard
22494 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
22496 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
22497 \begin_inset space \space{}
22504 \begin_layout Standard
22505 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
22506 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
22508 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22512 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
22513 and its alignment within the page.
22516 \begin_layout Standard
22518 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22528 height_special "totalheight"
22533 backgroundcolor "none"
22536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22539 This is a minipage.
22540 The text is set in an italic style.
22543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22546 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22547 another formatting.
22555 \begin_layout Standard
22556 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22559 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22563 as described in section
22564 \begin_inset space ~
22568 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22570 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
22575 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22581 \begin_layout Standard
22582 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22592 height_special "totalheight"
22597 backgroundcolor "none"
22600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22601 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22602 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22608 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22612 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22622 height_special "totalheight"
22627 backgroundcolor "none"
22630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22631 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22632 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22640 \begin_layout Standard
22641 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22647 \begin_layout Standard
22648 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
22650 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
22657 \begin_inset space ~
22665 \begin_layout Chapter
22666 Mathematical Formulas
22667 \begin_inset Index idx
22670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22677 \begin_inset Index idx
22680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22709 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22711 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22718 \begin_layout Standard
22719 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22724 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22727 \begin_layout Section
22729 \begin_inset Index idx
22732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22741 \begin_layout Standard
22742 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22755 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22757 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22758 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
22759 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
22761 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22767 \begin_layout Standard
22768 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
22772 \begin_inset space ~
22777 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
22780 \begin_layout Standard
22781 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
22782 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
22785 \begin_layout Standard
22786 This is a line with an inline formula
22787 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22793 \begin_layout Standard
22794 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
22795 paragraph, like this one:
22796 \begin_inset Formula
22803 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
22806 \begin_layout Standard
22808 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
22810 For example, typing
22811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22821 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22824 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
22825 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
22829 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
22832 \begin_inset space ~
22840 \begin_layout Subsection
22841 Navigating in Formulas
22842 \begin_inset Index idx
22845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22854 \begin_layout Standard
22855 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
22856 achieved with the arrow keys.
22858 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
22859 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
22864 will leave a formula construct (a square root
22865 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
22869 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
22873 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22876 \end{array}\right]$
22884 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
22889 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
22890 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
22893 \begin_layout Standard
22898 , printed in this document as
22899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22903 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22907 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22910 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
22911 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
22912 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
22917 For example, if you want
22918 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
22926 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22936 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22940 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22945 , since in the latter case only the
22948 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
22953 will be under the square root sign:
22954 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
22960 \begin_layout Standard
22961 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
22963 \begin_inset Formula
22965 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
22974 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
22975 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
22978 \begin_layout Subsection
22982 \begin_layout Standard
22983 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
22984 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
22988 and a cursor movement key to select text.
22989 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
22990 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
22991 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
22992 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
22996 \begin_layout Subsection
22997 Exponents and Subscripts
22998 \begin_inset Index idx
23001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23008 \begin_inset Index idx
23011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23020 \begin_layout Standard
23021 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
23024 arg "math-superscript"
23030 arg "math-subscript"
23033 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
23035 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
23038 , type in a formula
23041 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23051 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
23057 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
23061 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
23067 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23073 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
23075 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23079 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23082 , you have to use an extra
23086 to separate the circumflex and the character.
23087 For example, if you want
23088 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
23094 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23100 Subscripts are similar: To get
23101 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
23107 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23115 \begin_layout Subsection
23117 \begin_inset Index idx
23120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23129 \begin_layout Standard
23130 Create a fraction either with the command
23136 or by using the icon
23139 arg "math-insert \\frac"
23145 \begin_inset space ~
23151 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
23152 The cursor is above the fraction line.
23153 To move it to the bottom, simply press
23158 To move back up, press
23163 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
23164 \begin_inset Formula
23166 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
23169 \end{array}\right)}\right]
23177 \begin_layout Subsection
23179 \begin_inset Index idx
23182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23191 \begin_layout Standard
23192 Roots can be created using the
23195 \begin_inset space ~
23203 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
23209 arg "math-insert \\root"
23231 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
23237 always produces a square root.
23240 \begin_layout Subsection
23241 Operators with Limits
23242 \begin_inset Index idx
23245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23252 \begin_inset Index idx
23255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23262 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23264 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23271 \begin_layout Standard
23273 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
23277 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
23280 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
23281 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
23282 by entering them as you would enter a super-
23283 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
23284 The sum operator will automatically place its
23285 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23289 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23292 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
23294 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
23298 \begin_inset Formula
23300 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
23305 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
23309 \begin_layout Standard
23310 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
23312 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
23313 behind the operator and using the menu
23315 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23316 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
23318 \begin_inset space ~
23322 \begin_inset space ~
23336 \begin_layout Standard
23337 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
23338 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23342 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23346 \begin_inset Index idx
23349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23356 \begin_inset Formula
23358 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
23363 which will place the
23364 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
23368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23376 In inline formulas it looks like this:
23377 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
23383 \begin_layout Standard
23384 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
23391 Have a look at section
23392 \begin_inset space ~
23396 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23398 reference "subsec:Functions"
23402 for an explanation of function macros.
23405 \begin_layout Subsection
23407 \begin_inset Index idx
23410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23419 \begin_layout Standard
23420 Most math symbols can be found in the
23423 \begin_inset space ~
23428 under one of several categories; including
23445 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
23449 \begin_layout Standard
23450 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
23451 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
23452 don't have to use the
23455 \begin_inset space ~
23460 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
23462 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
23465 \begin_layout Subsection
23467 \begin_inset Index idx
23470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23479 \begin_layout Standard
23480 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
23486 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
23492 \begin_inset space ~
23500 arg "math-insert \\space"
23504 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
23505 For example, the sequence
23510 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
23513 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
23515 \begin_inset Graphics
23516 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
23521 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
23522 the space marker and enter space again several times.
23523 With every space enter the size will be changed.
23524 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
23525 , because they are negative
23527 Here are two examples:
23530 \begin_layout Standard
23540 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
23546 \begin_layout Standard
23556 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
23562 \begin_layout Subsection
23564 \begin_inset Index idx
23567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23574 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23576 name "subsec:Functions"
23583 \begin_layout Standard
23587 \begin_inset space ~
23592 contains under the button
23595 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23598 a number of function macros, such as
23599 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23603 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23611 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23618 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23619 avoid confusions, because
23620 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23624 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23630 \begin_layout Standard
23631 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23633 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23637 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23643 \begin_layout Standard
23644 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
23645 are placed, as described in section
23646 \begin_inset space ~
23650 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23652 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23659 \begin_layout Subsection
23661 \begin_inset Index idx
23664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23673 \begin_layout Standard
23674 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23676 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23677 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
23678 commands, for example, to enter
23679 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23682 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
23683 Our example is entered by typing
23688 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23695 \begin_inset space ~
23699 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23701 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23705 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23708 \begin_layout Standard
23709 \begin_inset Float table
23714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23715 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23718 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23720 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23724 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23734 \begin_inset Tabular
23735 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23736 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23737 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23738 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23739 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23823 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23877 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
23887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23931 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
23941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23985 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
23995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24039 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
24049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24093 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
24103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24147 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
24157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24201 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
24211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24255 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
24265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24300 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
24321 \begin_layout Standard
24322 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
24325 \begin_inset space ~
24333 arg "math-insert \\hat"
24336 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
24340 \begin_layout Section
24341 Brackets and Delimiters
24342 \begin_inset Index idx
24345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24352 \begin_inset Index idx
24355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24362 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24364 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24371 \begin_layout Standard
24372 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
24374 For some purposes, using just the keys
24379 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
24380 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
24381 toolbar delimiter icon
24384 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24388 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
24389 \begin_inset Formula
24391 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
24399 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
24400 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
24404 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24407 and the expression on the right was entered using the
24413 \begin_inset Formula
24415 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
24423 \begin_layout Standard
24424 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
24425 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
24429 \begin_layout Standard
24430 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
24431 left side and right side.
24432 If you use the option
24435 \begin_inset space ~
24440 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
24441 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
24443 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
24448 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
24449 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
24452 \begin_layout Standard
24453 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
24454 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
24455 is to go inside the brackets.
24456 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
24461 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
24462 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
24463 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
24467 arg "math-delim ( )"
24473 \begin_layout Section
24474 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
24475 \begin_inset Index idx
24478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24485 \begin_inset Index idx
24488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24495 \begin_inset Index idx
24498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24499 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24507 \begin_layout Standard
24508 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24512 \begin_inset space ~
24520 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
24524 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
24525 Here is an example:
24526 \begin_inset Formula
24528 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24537 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
24538 \begin_inset space ~
24542 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24544 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24549 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
24550 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
24551 This alignment is set in the box
24556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24568 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24576 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24580 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24588 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24594 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24602 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24605 for every column as default.
24606 For example, the sequence
24607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24615 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24618 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24619 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24620 corresponds to the relevant column.
24621 The result will look like this:
24622 \begin_inset Formula
24625 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
24626 column & has & has\,right\\
24627 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
24636 \begin_layout Standard
24637 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
24640 arg "newline-insert newline"
24643 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24644 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24646 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24649 or the math toolbar.
24652 \begin_layout Standard
24653 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24654 It can be created with the menu
24656 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24657 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24659 \begin_inset space ~
24671 Here is an example:
24672 \begin_inset Formula
24686 \begin_layout Standard
24687 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24690 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24693 arg "newline-insert newline"
24697 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24702 arg "newline-insert newline"
24705 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24706 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24710 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24713 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24714 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24715 A new row is created by every further entry of
24718 arg "newline-insert newline"
24722 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24723 Here is an example:
24724 \begin_inset Formula
24726 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24727 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24732 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24733 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24734 \begin_inset Formula
24736 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24744 \begin_layout Standard
24745 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24752 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24753 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24754 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24756 reference "eq:asquared"
24761 The other types are described in section
24762 \begin_inset space ~
24766 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24768 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
24775 \begin_layout Section
24776 Formula Numbering and Referencing
24777 \begin_inset Index idx
24780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24781 Math ! Formula numbering
24787 \begin_inset Index idx
24790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24791 Math ! Referencing formulas
24797 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24799 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
24806 \begin_layout Standard
24807 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
24809 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24810 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24812 \begin_inset space ~
24816 \begin_inset space ~
24824 arg "math-number-toggle"
24828 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24829 within parentheses.
24830 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
24831 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
24832 the document class.
24833 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
24834 separated by a dot:
24835 \begin_inset Formula
24845 arg "math-number-toggle"
24848 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
24849 You can only number displayed formulas.
24852 \begin_layout Standard
24853 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
24855 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24856 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24858 \begin_inset space ~
24862 \begin_inset space ~
24870 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
24873 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
24874 \begin_inset Formula
24877 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
24883 To number all lines use the shortcut
24886 arg "math-number-toggle"
24892 \begin_layout Standard
24893 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24896 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
24897 A label is inserted with the menu
24899 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24908 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
24909 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
24910 It is recommended that you use the suggested
24911 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24922 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
24923 label type when you have many labels in your document.
24924 We inserted in the following example the label
24925 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24929 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24932 in the second line:
24933 \begin_inset Formula
24935 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
24936 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
24941 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
24942 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
24943 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
24945 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24947 \begin_inset space ~
24955 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
24959 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
24960 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24961 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
24962 as the formula number:
24965 \begin_layout Standard
24966 This is a cross-reference to equation (
24967 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24969 reference "eq:tanhExp"
24976 \begin_layout Standard
24977 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
24978 's cross-reference box are described in section
24979 \begin_inset space ~
24983 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24985 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24990 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
24998 \begin_layout Section
24999 User defined math macros
25000 \begin_inset Index idx
25003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25012 \begin_layout Standard
25014 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
25015 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
25016 Math macros are explained in section
25019 \begin_inset space ~
25031 \begin_layout Section
25035 \begin_layout Subsection
25037 \begin_inset Index idx
25040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25049 \begin_layout Standard
25050 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
25051 To set a font in a formula, use the
25054 \begin_inset space ~
25062 arg "math-insert \\font"
25065 , or enter its command, listed in table
25066 \begin_inset space ~
25070 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25072 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25079 \begin_layout Standard
25080 \begin_inset Float table
25085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25086 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25089 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25091 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25095 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
25103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25105 \begin_inset Tabular
25106 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
25107 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25108 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25109 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25141 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
25149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25168 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
25176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25195 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
25203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25228 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
25236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25255 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
25263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25282 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
25290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25316 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
25324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25343 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
25351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25377 \begin_layout Standard
25378 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25386 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
25402 \begin_layout Standard
25403 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
25404 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
25409 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
25410 space when you need a space in the box.
25411 Here is an example where
25412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25416 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25423 denotes the set of numbers:
25424 \begin_inset Formula
25426 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
25434 \begin_layout Standard
25435 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
25436 You can, for example, put a character in
25445 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
25449 \begin_inset Newline newline
25452 So it is better not to use this feature.
25455 \begin_layout Standard
25456 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
25457 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
25461 \begin_inset Newline newline
25464 You can only print them emboldened using the command
25470 , which works like the other typeface commands:
25471 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
25477 \begin_layout Standard
25484 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
25487 \begin_layout Standard
25488 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
25490 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25491 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25493 \begin_inset space ~
25501 \begin_layout Subsection
25503 \begin_inset Index idx
25506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25515 \begin_layout Standard
25516 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
25518 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
25522 \begin_inset space ~
25526 \begin_inset space ~
25534 \begin_inset space ~
25542 arg "math-insert \\font"
25546 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25547 in black instead of blue.
25548 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
25549 Here is an example:
25550 \begin_inset Formula
25553 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25554 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25563 \begin_layout Subsection
25565 \begin_inset Index idx
25568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25577 \begin_layout Standard
25578 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25579 automatically chosen in most situations.
25597 For most characters,
25605 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25606 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25611 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25612 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
25613 thinks are appropriate.
25614 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25617 arg "math-insert \\style"
25621 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25622 For example, you can set
25623 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25626 , which is normally in
25635 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25639 The four styles are used in the following example:
25642 \begin_layout Standard
25643 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25647 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25651 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25655 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25661 \begin_layout Standard
25662 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25663 is set in a particular size with the menu
25665 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25667 \begin_inset space ~
25672 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25673 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25674 will be adjusted to correspond.
25675 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25680 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25686 \begin_layout Standard
25690 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25696 \begin_layout Section
25697 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
25699 \begin_inset Index idx
25702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25709 \begin_inset Index idx
25712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25721 \begin_layout Standard
25723 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
25724 that are in common use.
25727 \begin_layout Subsection
25728 Enabling AMS-Support
25731 \begin_layout Standard
25732 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
25733 the document by selecting the checkbox
25736 \begin_inset space ~
25740 \begin_inset space ~
25744 \begin_inset space ~
25751 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
25755 \begin_inset Index idx
25758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25759 Document ! Settings
25767 \begin_inset space ~
25773 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
25774 -errors in formulas,
25775 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
25778 \begin_layout Subsection
25780 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25782 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
25787 \begin_inset Index idx
25790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25791 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25799 \begin_layout Standard
25800 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
25801 provides a selection of different formula types.
25803 allows you to choose between
25824 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
25825 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
25831 , for an explanation of these formula types.
25834 \begin_layout Chapter
25838 \begin_layout Section
25840 \begin_inset Index idx
25843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25850 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25852 name "sec:Cross-References"
25859 \begin_layout Standard
25860 One of \SpecialChar LyX
25861 's strengths is cross-references.
25862 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
25864 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
25865 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
25866 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
25869 \begin_layout Enumerate
25873 \begin_layout Enumerate
25874 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25876 name "enu:Second-item"
25883 \begin_layout Enumerate
25887 \begin_layout Standard
25888 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
25890 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25893 or by pressing the toolbar button
25900 A gray label box like this:
25901 \begin_inset Graphics
25902 filename clipart/labelQt4.png
25907 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
25909 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
25911 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25924 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25932 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25936 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25940 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25944 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
25945 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
25947 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25955 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25961 \begin_layout Standard
25962 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
25964 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25967 or the toolbar button
25970 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25974 A gray cross-reference box like this:
25975 \begin_inset Graphics
25976 filename clipart/referenceQt4.png
25981 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
25983 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
25984 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25992 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25996 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
26000 \begin_layout Standard
26001 As an alternative to
26003 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26006 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
26011 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
26012 to the actual cursor position via the menu
26014 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26026 \begin_layout Standard
26027 Here is our cross-reference: Item
26028 \begin_inset space ~
26032 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26034 reference "enu:Second-item"
26041 \begin_layout Standard
26042 It is recommended to use a protected space
26046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26047 described in section
26048 \begin_inset space ~
26052 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26054 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
26063 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
26064 line breaks between them.
26067 \begin_layout Standard
26068 There are six formats of cross-references:
26071 \begin_layout Description
26072 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
26073 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26075 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26082 \begin_layout Description
26083 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
26084 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
26086 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26090 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26094 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26096 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26103 \begin_layout Description
26104 <page>: prints the page number: Page
26105 \begin_inset space ~
26109 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26110 LatexCommand pageref
26111 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26118 \begin_layout Description
26120 \begin_inset space ~
26124 \begin_inset space ~
26127 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
26128 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26129 LatexCommand vpageref
26130 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26135 \begin_inset Newline newline
26138 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
26139 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
26140 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
26141 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
26142 it prints “on the next page”.
26143 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
26146 \begin_layout Description
26148 \begin_inset space ~
26152 \begin_inset space ~
26156 \begin_inset space ~
26159 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
26160 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26162 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26167 \begin_inset Newline newline
26170 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
26176 ; otherwise it behaves like
26180 \begin_inset space ~
26184 \begin_inset space ~
26193 \begin_layout Description
26195 \begin_inset space ~
26198 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
26199 \begin_inset Newline newline
26203 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26211 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26221 \begin_inset Index idx
26224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26226 -packages ! prettyref
26232 \begin_inset Index idx
26235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26237 -packages ! refstyle
26248 \begin_inset Newline newline
26251 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
26252 -package should be used for this feature by setting
26255 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
26259 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26260 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26268 is the default and preferred because
26272 supports only English documents.
26273 The format is specified by using the command
26285 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26286 preamble of the document.
26287 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
26289 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26297 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26300 ) can be done with this command
26301 \begin_inset Newline newline
26308 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
26313 \begin_inset Newline newline
26316 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
26318 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26320 key "prettyref,refstyle"
26327 \begin_layout Description
26329 \begin_inset space ~
26332 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
26333 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26334 LatexCommand nameref
26335 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26342 \begin_layout Standard
26343 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
26344 is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
26346 The varieties are adjusted in the field
26350 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
26354 \begin_layout Standard
26355 You can only use the style
26359 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
26363 is always possible.
26366 \begin_layout Standard
26367 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
26368 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
26370 Referencing formulas is explained in section
26371 \begin_inset space ~
26375 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26377 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26384 \begin_layout Standard
26385 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
26389 \begin_inset space ~
26393 \begin_inset space ~
26398 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
26399 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
26402 \begin_inset space ~
26407 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
26408 You can also go back with the toolbar button
26411 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
26417 \begin_layout Standard
26418 You can change labels at any time.
26419 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
26420 do not need to think about this.
26423 \begin_layout Standard
26424 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
26426 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
26430 \begin_layout Standard
26431 References are described in detail in the section
26432 \begin_inset space ~
26436 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26440 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26446 \begin_inset space ~
26454 \begin_layout Section
26455 Table of Contents and other Listings
26456 \begin_inset Index idx
26459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26466 \begin_inset Index idx
26469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26476 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26485 \begin_layout Subsection
26487 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26489 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
26496 \begin_layout Standard
26497 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
26499 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26500 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
26502 \begin_inset space ~
26506 \begin_inset space ~
26512 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
26514 If you click on it, the
26518 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26519 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26520 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26522 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
26524 \begin_inset space ~
26529 that is described in section
26530 \begin_inset space ~
26534 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26536 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
26543 \begin_layout Standard
26544 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26545 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26547 \begin_inset space ~
26551 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26553 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26557 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26559 \begin_inset space ~
26563 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26565 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
26569 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26571 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26574 \begin_layout Subsection
26575 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
26576 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26578 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
26585 \begin_layout Standard
26586 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
26588 You can insert them via the
26590 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26594 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26597 \begin_layout Section
26598 URLs and Hyperlinks
26599 \begin_inset Index idx
26602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26609 \begin_inset Index idx
26612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26621 \begin_layout Subsection
26623 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26632 \begin_layout Standard
26633 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26635 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26641 \begin_layout Standard
26642 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
26644 \begin_inset Flex URL
26647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26657 \begin_layout Standard
26658 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26664 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26668 \begin_layout Standard
26669 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26677 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
26686 \begin_layout Subsection
26688 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26690 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
26697 \begin_layout Standard
26698 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26700 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26703 or with the toolbar button
26710 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26719 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26720 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26721 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26723 name "LyX's homepage"
26724 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26728 , an Email address like this:
26729 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26731 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26732 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26737 , or a link to a file.
26740 \begin_layout Standard
26741 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26743 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26754 to the link target.
26757 \begin_layout Standard
26758 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
26759 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
26760 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
26761 the text style dialog.
26762 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
26766 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26768 name "LyX's homepage"
26769 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26776 \begin_layout Standard
26777 The link text color can be changed, when the option
26781 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
26783 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26784 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26788 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
26790 \begin_inset Newline newline
26798 \begin_inset Newline newline
26805 in the PDF Properties dialog.
26808 \begin_layout Section
26810 \begin_inset Index idx
26813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26820 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26822 name "sec:Appendices"
26829 \begin_layout Standard
26830 Appendices are created with the menu
26832 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26834 \begin_inset space ~
26838 \begin_inset space ~
26844 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
26845 as the appendix part of the book.
26846 This part is marked with a red borderline.
26849 \begin_layout Standard
26850 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
26851 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
26852 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
26853 and the subsection number.
26854 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
26858 \begin_layout Standard
26860 \begin_inset space ~
26864 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26866 reference "chap:Credits"
26871 \begin_inset space ~
26875 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26877 reference "subsec:Export"
26884 \begin_layout Section
26886 \begin_inset Index idx
26889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26896 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26898 name "sec:Bibliography"
26905 \begin_layout Standard
26906 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
26908 You can include a bibliography database,
26912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26913 Known under the name
26914 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26917 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
26919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26927 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
26928 manually, using the paragraph environment
26932 , which was described in section
26933 \begin_inset space ~
26937 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26939 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
26944 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
26945 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
26949 use a bibliography database.
26952 \begin_layout Subsection
26953 The Bibliography Environment
26956 \begin_layout Standard
26961 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
26963 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
26972 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
26974 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
26977 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26981 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26984 , a short form of its title, as the key.
26987 \begin_layout Standard
26988 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
26990 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26993 or the toolbar button
26996 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
27000 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
27001 containing the available citations.
27002 Select one or more keys from the list and
27012 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
27013 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
27017 \begin_layout Standard
27018 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
27019 entry with surrounding brackets.
27024 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
27025 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
27027 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27031 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27037 \begin_layout Standard
27041 Companion Second Edition
27044 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27046 key "latexcompanion"
27053 \begin_layout Standard
27054 The \SpecialChar LyX
27055 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
27056 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27065 \begin_layout Standard
27066 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
27069 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27071 \begin_inset space ~
27079 arg "layout-paragraph"
27083 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
27086 \begin_layout Subsection
27087 Bibliography databases (Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27089 \begin_inset Index idx
27092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27093 Bibliography ! Databases
27099 \begin_inset Index idx
27102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27103 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27110 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27112 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
27119 \begin_layout Standard
27120 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
27125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27126 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
27128 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
27129 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
27134 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
27136 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
27137 your working field in a database.
27138 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
27139 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
27140 list for that document.
27141 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
27145 \begin_layout Standard
27146 The database is a text file with the file extension
27147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27155 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27158 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
27159 The format is explained in
27160 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27166 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27168 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27170 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
27175 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
27176 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
27177 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
27179 \begin_inset Flex URL
27182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27184 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
27192 \begin_layout Standard
27193 To use a database, use the menu
27195 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27200 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27202 \begin_inset space ~
27208 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
27209 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
27216 Add bibliography to TOC
27218 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
27223 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
27224 in the document or just the cited references.
27227 \begin_layout Standard
27228 The style file is a text file with the file extension
27229 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27240 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
27241 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
27242 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
27243 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
27245 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
27250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27251 For information on how this is done, have a look at
27252 \begin_inset Newline newline
27256 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27258 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
27270 \begin_layout Standard
27271 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
27274 \begin_layout Standard
27275 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
27276 uses the program Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27278 You can choose which of its variants should be used by \SpecialChar LyX
27285 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27286 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27291 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
27292 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
27293 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
27297 The following variants are possible:
27300 \begin_layout Description
27301 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
27302 with other bibliography packages (e.
27303 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27307 \begin_inset space \space{}
27314 ), only with the package
27318 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
27322 \begin_layout Description
27323 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
27324 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
27325 with all bibliography packages, except
27330 \begin_layout Description
27331 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
27336 , works with all bibliography packages
27339 \begin_layout Standard
27340 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27341 can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
27343 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
27346 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27350 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27359 \begin_layout Standard
27360 When you select the option
27362 Sectioned bibliography
27366 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27367 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27370 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
27371 This and other options are explained in detail in section
27373 Customizing Bibliographies
27377 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27382 Additional Features
27387 \begin_layout Standard
27388 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
27389 the two methods of creating them.
27390 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
27391 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
27392 We used the style file
27396 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
27399 \begin_layout Subsection
27400 Bibliography layout
27401 \begin_inset Index idx
27404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27405 Bibliography ! Layout
27413 \begin_layout Standard
27414 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
27415 For this feature you need to enable the option
27421 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27425 \begin_inset Index idx
27428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27429 Document ! Settings
27439 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
27440 For the global citation format use the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27441 style files as explained in
27442 the previous section.
27445 \begin_layout Standard
27446 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
27447 the citation reference window.
27448 Here is an example where the text
27449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27453 \begin_inset space ~
27457 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27460 appears after the reference:
27463 \begin_layout Standard
27465 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27468 key "latexcompanion"
27475 \begin_layout Section
27477 \begin_inset Index idx
27480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27487 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27496 \begin_layout Standard
27497 An index entry is created if you use the menu
27499 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27501 \begin_inset space ~
27506 or the toolbar button
27513 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
27514 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
27515 by \SpecialChar LyX
27516 as the index entry.
27519 \begin_layout Standard
27520 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
27522 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27523 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27525 \begin_inset space ~
27531 A light blue box labeled
27532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27540 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27543 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27544 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
27548 \begin_layout Standard
27549 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27550 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
27551 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
27552 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27554 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27556 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27563 \begin_layout Subsection
27564 Grouping Index Entries
27565 \begin_inset Index idx
27568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27577 \begin_layout Standard
27578 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27580 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27581 lists under the entry
27582 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27586 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27590 First we create the entry
27591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27599 \begin_inset space ~
27603 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27605 reference "subsec:Lists"
27610 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27611 \begin_inset space ~
27615 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27617 reference "sec:Itemize"
27621 , we insert the command
27624 \begin_layout Standard
27630 \begin_layout Standard
27634 \begin_layout Standard
27640 \begin_layout Standard
27641 for the enumerated list in section
27642 \begin_inset space ~
27646 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27648 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27655 \begin_layout Standard
27656 The exclamation mark
27657 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27664 marks the grouping levels.
27665 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27666 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27667 If we don't have an index entry for
27668 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27672 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27675 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27678 \begin_layout Subsection
27680 \begin_inset Index idx
27683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27684 Index ! Page ranges
27692 \begin_layout Standard
27693 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27695 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27696 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
27697 an index entry in section
27698 \begin_inset space ~
27702 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27704 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27711 \begin_layout Standard
27714 Paragraph environments|(
27717 \begin_layout Standard
27718 and another entry at the end of section
27719 \begin_inset space ~
27723 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27725 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
27732 \begin_layout Standard
27735 Paragraph environments|)
27738 \begin_layout Standard
27740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27760 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27763 respectively start and end the index range.
27764 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
27765 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
27766 the pages of the indexed document parts.
27767 An example is the index entry
27768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27771 Document ! Settings
27772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27778 \begin_layout Subsection
27780 \begin_inset Index idx
27783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27784 Index ! Cross referencing
27792 \begin_layout Standard
27793 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
27794 We referred for example in the index entry
27795 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27799 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27803 \begin_inset space ~
27807 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27809 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
27813 ) to the index entry
27814 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27818 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27821 in the same section using the entry
27824 \begin_layout Standard
27827 GIF|see{Image formats}
27830 \begin_layout Standard
27831 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
27833 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
27834 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
27837 \begin_layout Subsection
27839 \begin_inset Index idx
27842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27843 Index ! Entry order
27851 \begin_layout Standard
27852 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
27853 follow the rules for the index order.
27854 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
27859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27860 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
27862 \begin_inset space ~
27866 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27868 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
27877 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
27878 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
27879 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27887 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27899 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27903 \begin_inset Index idx
27906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27907 Dummy entries ! maïs
27913 \begin_inset Index idx
27916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27917 Dummy entries ! maître
27923 \begin_inset Index idx
27926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27927 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
27932 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
27933 maïs, maison, maître.
27934 To achieve this, we use the command
27937 \begin_layout Standard
27940 previous entry@current entry
27943 \begin_layout Standard
27944 In our case we want to have
27945 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27949 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27957 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27960 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
27963 \begin_layout Standard
27969 \begin_layout Standard
27970 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
27971 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
27973 See the next subsection for an example.
27976 \begin_layout Standard
27977 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27983 \begin_layout Standard
27984 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
27989 to generate the index (see sec.
27990 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27994 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27996 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28005 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28006 -package aeguill in sec.
28007 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28011 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28013 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
28017 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
28018 -packages although all these index
28019 commands start with
28020 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28029 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28033 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
28038 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
28041 \begin_layout Standard
28053 \begin_layout Standard
28065 \begin_layout Subsection
28067 \begin_inset Index idx
28070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28071 Index ! Entry layout
28079 \begin_layout Standard
28080 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
28081 \begin_inset Index idx
28084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28087 This is an italic dummy entry
28092 You can also format the page number using the character
28093 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28097 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28100 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28101 -command without a backslash.
28102 We can write for example
28105 \begin_layout Standard
28108 italic page number:|textit
28111 \begin_layout Standard
28112 to get the page number in italic.
28113 \begin_inset Index idx
28116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28117 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
28122 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
28123 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
28125 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28133 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28141 \begin_inset space ~
28147 Have a look at section
28148 \begin_inset space ~
28152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28154 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28158 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28162 \begin_layout Standard
28163 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28171 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
28175 to generate the index, see sec.
28176 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28180 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28182 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28191 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
28196 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
28197 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28200 key "latexcompanion"
28212 \begin_layout Standard
28213 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
28215 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
28216 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
28217 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
28218 If so, put the following in the preamble
28221 \begin_layout Standard
28233 \begin_layout Standard
28237 \begin_layout Standard
28243 \begin_layout Standard
28244 in the index entry.
28245 \begin_inset Index idx
28248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28249 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
28254 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
28255 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
28256 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
28259 \begin_layout Standard
28260 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
28261 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
28262 a bold font for all index entries.
28263 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
28275 documentation for details,
28276 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28278 key "makeindex,xindy"
28285 \begin_layout Subsection
28287 \begin_inset Index idx
28290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28297 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28299 name "subsec:Index-Program"
28306 \begin_layout Standard
28307 If the index generation program
28311 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
28312 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
28316 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
28317 distribution, is used.
28321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28326 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
28327 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
28328 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
28329 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
28330 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
28340 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
28342 dialog, see section
28343 \begin_inset space ~
28347 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28349 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
28354 The available options are listed and explained in
28355 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28357 key "makeindex,xindy"
28362 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
28366 \begin_layout Standard
28367 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
28368 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
28371 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28372 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28376 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
28377 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
28380 \begin_layout Subsection
28384 \begin_layout Standard
28385 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
28386 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
28387 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28391 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28394 next to the standard index.
28396 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
28397 that add this feature.
28404 \begin_inset Index idx
28407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28409 -packages ! splitidx
28414 package to generate multiple indexes.
28415 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
28420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28421 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
28423 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28430 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28431 style, but it also includes
28432 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
28433 Please consult the package's manual for details.
28441 \begin_layout Standard
28442 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
28443 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
28445 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28446 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28449 and select the option
28451 Use multiple Indexes
28458 already contains the standard index
28459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28467 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
28468 also appear as a heading) to the
28472 input field and press the
28477 The new index now also appears in the list.
28478 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
28479 label color to the new index.
28482 \begin_layout Standard
28483 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
28486 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28493 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
28494 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
28495 are additional features:
28498 \begin_layout Itemize
28499 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
28500 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
28503 \begin_layout Itemize
28504 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
28505 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
28506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28513 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
28514 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
28515 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
28516 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
28519 \begin_layout Section
28520 Nomenclature/Glossary
28521 \begin_inset Index idx
28524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28531 \begin_inset Index idx
28534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28563 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28565 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28572 \begin_layout Standard
28573 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
28574 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
28575 called nomenclature or glossary.
28578 \begin_layout Standard
28579 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28586 \begin_inset Index idx
28589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28591 -packages ! nomencl
28597 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
28599 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28605 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28609 \begin_layout Standard
28610 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28611 and then use the menu
28613 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28619 \begin_inset space ~
28624 or the toolbar button
28627 arg "nomencl-insert"
28632 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28640 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28643 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28646 \begin_layout Standard
28647 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28648 The first is the term or
28652 that you wish to define.
28657 of the term or symbol.
28660 \begin_layout Standard
28661 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28669 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
28670 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28678 \begin_layout Subsection
28679 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28680 \begin_inset Index idx
28683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28684 Nomenclature ! Layout
28692 \begin_layout Standard
28693 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28697 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
28700 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28704 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28708 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28712 \begin_inset Newline newline
28720 \begin_inset Newline newline
28726 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28733 character starts/ends the formula.
28734 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
28735 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
28737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28747 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
28757 \begin_layout Standard
28758 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28759 -syntax is given in section
28760 \begin_inset space ~
28764 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28766 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28773 \begin_layout Standard
28777 \begin_inset space ~
28782 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
28784 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
28785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28789 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28793 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28796 in this document is:
28797 \begin_inset Newline newline
28802 dummy entry for the character
28807 \begin_inset Newline newline
28819 \begin_inset space ~
28829 font use the command
28858 \begin_layout Standard
28859 If the characters |
28860 \begin_inset space \space{}
28864 \begin_inset space \space{}
28868 \begin_inset space \space{}
28872 \begin_inset space \space{}
28876 \begin_inset space \space{}
28879 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
28880 a quote character in front of them.
28881 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28882 LatexCommand nomenclature
28883 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
28884 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
28891 \begin_layout Subsection
28892 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
28893 \begin_inset Index idx
28896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28897 Nomenclature ! Sort order
28905 \begin_layout Standard
28906 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28907 -code of the symbol
28909 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
28911 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
28914 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28915 LatexCommand nomenclature
28917 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
28924 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28928 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28929 LatexCommand nomenclature
28932 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
28937 They will be sorted by
28938 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28946 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28950 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28960 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28964 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28967 will be sorted before the
28971 since the character
28972 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28976 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28979 is considered in sorting.
28982 \begin_layout Standard
28983 To control the sort order, you can edit the
28986 \begin_inset space ~
28991 field of the nomenclature dialog.
28992 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
28994 For the example given, you can insert
28998 in this field for the
28999 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29006 will be located before
29007 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29013 \begin_layout Standard
29014 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
29019 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29028 \begin_layout Subsection
29029 Nomenclature Options
29030 \begin_inset Index idx
29033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29034 Nomenclature ! Options
29042 \begin_layout Standard
29047 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
29048 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
29051 \begin_layout Description
29052 refeq Appends the phrase
29053 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29065 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29068 to every nomenclature entry, where
29074 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
29077 \begin_layout Description
29078 refpage Appends the phrase
29079 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29094 to every nomenclature entry, where
29100 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
29103 \begin_layout Description
29104 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
29107 \begin_layout Standard
29108 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
29109 class options list in the
29111 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29115 In this document the options
29122 \begin_layout Standard
29123 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29129 \begin_layout Standard
29130 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
29131 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
29136 field in the nomenclature dialog:
29139 \begin_layout Description
29149 \begin_layout Description
29152 nomrefpage Like the
29159 \begin_layout Description
29162 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
29171 \begin_layout Description
29175 \begin_inset space ~
29181 \begin_inset space ~
29186 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
29189 \begin_layout Standard
29191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29195 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29198 are automatically translated for some document languages.
29199 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
29203 \begin_layout Standard
29211 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
29214 \begin_inset Newline newline
29221 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
29226 \begin_inset Newline newline
29230 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29234 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29238 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29242 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29245 by their translation.
29248 \begin_layout Subsection
29249 Printing the Nomenclature
29250 \begin_inset Index idx
29253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29254 Nomenclature ! Printing
29262 \begin_layout Standard
29263 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
29265 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29266 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29279 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29282 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
29283 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
29284 You can choose between these settings:
29287 \begin_layout Description
29288 Default a space of 1
29289 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29295 \begin_layout Description
29297 \begin_inset space ~
29301 \begin_inset space ~
29304 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
29307 \begin_layout Description
29308 Custom custom space
29311 \begin_layout Standard
29312 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
29313 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29321 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
29329 For example, in order to change the name to
29333 , add the following line to the preamble:
29336 \begin_layout Standard
29344 nomname}{List of Symbols}
29347 \begin_layout Subsection
29348 Nomenclature Program
29349 \begin_inset Index idx
29352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29353 Nomenclature ! Program
29359 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29361 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
29368 \begin_layout Standard
29374 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
29375 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
29377 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
29382 by adding options, see section
29383 \begin_inset space ~
29387 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29389 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
29394 The available options are listed and explained in
29395 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29397 key "nomencl,makeindex"
29404 \begin_layout Section
29406 \begin_inset Index idx
29409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29416 \begin_inset Index idx
29419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29420 Document ! Branches
29426 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29428 name "sec:Branches"
29435 \begin_layout Standard
29436 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
29437 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
29438 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
29439 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
29442 \begin_layout Standard
29443 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
29444 allows you to put text into branches.
29445 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
29446 To create a branch, either select the menu
29448 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29449 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
29452 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
29454 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29461 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
29462 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
29463 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
29464 and whether the name of the branch should
29465 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
29466 (see below for an example).
29467 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
29468 to the name of the other) and to add
29469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29477 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29481 \begin_inset space ~
29484 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
29485 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
29488 \begin_layout Standard
29489 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
29490 These boxes are inserted via the menu
29492 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29495 where you can choose a branch.
29496 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
29500 \begin_layout Standard
29501 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
29502 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
29505 \begin_layout Standard
29506 \begin_inset Branch Question
29509 \begin_layout Standard
29510 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
29518 \begin_layout Standard
29519 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29522 \begin_layout Standard
29523 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
29531 \begin_layout Standard
29538 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29539 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29542 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
29543 Consider for example a file
29544 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29548 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29551 which has the above branches.
29553 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29560 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29561 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29565 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29569 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29573 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29584 branch were inactive,
29585 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29589 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29593 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29597 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29600 branch was active, likewise
29601 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29605 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29616 branch was active, and
29617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29620 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29624 if both branches were active.
29625 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
29628 \begin_layout Standard
29629 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29635 \begin_layout Standard
29636 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29637 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
29638 definitions for each branch.
29639 For example you can define for the question branch
29643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29644 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29645 -syntax, see section
29646 \begin_inset space ~
29650 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29652 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
29664 \begin_layout Standard
29674 \begin_layout Standard
29684 \begin_layout Standard
29685 and for the answer branch
29688 \begin_layout Standard
29698 \begin_layout Standard
29708 \begin_layout Standard
29709 \begin_inset Branch Question
29712 \begin_layout Standard
29716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29744 \begin_layout Standard
29745 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29748 \begin_layout Standard
29752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29780 \begin_layout Standard
29781 Now it is possible to use the
29785 question{\SpecialChar ldots
29792 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
29795 commands to obtain conditional output.
29796 Here is an example formula where only the
29803 \begin_inset Formula
29805 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
29813 \begin_layout Standard
29814 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
29822 \begin_layout Standard
29823 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
29825 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29829 \begin_inset space \space{}
29832 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
29834 For this advanced usage, see the
29839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29842 Flex insets and InsetLayout
29843 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29849 \begin_layout Section
29851 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29853 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
29858 \begin_inset Index idx
29861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29870 \begin_layout Standard
29873 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29874 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29877 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
29879 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29885 \begin_inset Index idx
29888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29890 -packages ! hyperref
29895 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
29896 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
29897 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
29898 part of the document.
29902 \begin_layout Standard
29903 The header information in the dialog tab
29907 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
29908 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
29909 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
29910 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
29914 \begin_inset space ~
29918 \begin_inset space ~
29923 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
29924 tries to extract the header information from your document title
29925 and author entries.
29929 \begin_inset space ~
29933 \begin_inset space ~
29937 \begin_inset space ~
29942 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
29945 \begin_layout Standard
29946 You can specify in the dialog tab
29950 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
29955 \begin_inset space ~
29959 \begin_inset space ~
29963 \begin_inset space ~
29968 option allows long links to be split;
29971 \begin_inset space ~
29975 \begin_inset space ~
29979 \begin_inset space ~
29987 \begin_inset space ~
29992 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
29995 \begin_inset space ~
30000 colors the different links.
30001 The default colors are:
30004 \begin_layout Labeling
30005 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30010 for hyperlinks and URLs
30013 \begin_layout Labeling
30014 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30022 \begin_layout Labeling
30023 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30031 \begin_layout Standard
30032 but you can change these in the field
30037 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
30040 \begin_layout Standard
30043 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
30046 \begin_layout Standard
30051 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
30052 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
30053 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
30056 \begin_layout Standard
30061 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
30062 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
30063 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
30073 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
30074 when opening the PDF.
30076 \begin_inset space ~
30079 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
30080 \begin_inset space ~
30083 1 will only display the sections.
30086 \begin_layout Standard
30087 PDF properties are also used in this document.
30088 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
30094 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
30095 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30104 \begin_layout Section
30106 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30108 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30110 name "sec:TeX-Code"
30117 \begin_layout Subsection
30120 \begin_inset Index idx
30123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30131 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30133 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
30140 \begin_layout Standard
30141 As \SpecialChar LyX
30142 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
30143 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
30144 commands and constructs,
30147 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
30148 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
30149 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
30150 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30151 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
30152 cannot support all packages and
30156 \begin_layout Standard
30157 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
30158 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
30159 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
30163 Code box is created by the menu
30165 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30167 \begin_inset space ~
30172 or by the toolbar button
30185 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
30193 \begin_layout Standard
30194 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
30196 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
30198 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
30199 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30206 , you can write the command part
30212 in a \SpecialChar TeX
30213 Code box before the word and the closing brace
30217 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
30218 Code box behind the word.
30219 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
30220 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
30224 \begin_layout Standard
30225 \begin_inset Graphics
30226 filename clipart/ERT.png
30234 \begin_layout Standard
30238 \begin_layout Standard
30239 This is a line with a
30243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30266 \begin_layout Standard
30267 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30275 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30276 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
30277 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
30278 know that the command is finished.
30286 \begin_layout Subsection
30287 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30289 \begin_inset Argument 1
30292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30293 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
30300 \begin_inset Index idx
30303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30311 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30313 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30320 \begin_layout Standard
30321 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
30322 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30323 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
30324 uses in the background.
30325 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
30326 is based on commands, you can
30327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30335 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
30336 any time if you know the right commands.
30337 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
30338 is the end of the day.
30339 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
30340 all caption labels bold.
30341 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
30343 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
30347 \begin_layout Standard
30348 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
30350 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30352 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30355 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30364 \begin_layout Standard
30365 As result you find that the package
30370 \begin_inset Index idx
30373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30375 -packages ! caption
30381 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
30383 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30386 \SpecialChar menuseparator
30390 \begin_inset space ~
30398 \begin_layout Standard
30403 usepackage[options]{package name}
30406 \begin_layout Standard
30407 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
30408 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
30409 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
30410 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
30413 \begin_layout Standard
30414 In your case the package name is
30419 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
30424 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
30425 So you add the command
30428 \begin_layout Standard
30433 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
30436 \begin_layout Standard
30437 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
30441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30442 For more commands provided by the
30446 package, have a look at its documentation,
30447 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30461 \begin_layout Standard
30462 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
30464 For example if you use a
30468 class, you don't need the package
30472 , you can instead write
30475 \begin_layout Standard
30480 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
30485 \begin_layout Standard
30486 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
30487 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
30488 documentation of the document class you want to use.
30495 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
30498 \begin_layout Standard
30499 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
30500 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
30502 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30503 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
30504 Code box as described in the previous
30508 \begin_layout Standard
30509 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30510 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30513 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30515 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
30522 \begin_layout Standard
30523 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
30529 \begin_layout Standard
30533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30543 \begin_inset Note Note
30546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30547 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
30555 \begin_layout Left Header
30556 \begin_inset Argument 1
30559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30579 \begin_inset Note Note
30582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30583 defines the header line as described below
30591 \begin_layout Center Header
30592 \begin_inset Argument 1
30595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30604 \begin_layout Right Header
30605 \begin_inset Argument 1
30608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30629 \begin_layout Left Footer
30630 \begin_inset Argument 1
30633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30654 \begin_layout Center Footer
30655 \begin_inset Argument 1
30658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30670 \begin_inset Newline newline
30674 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30680 \begin_layout Right Footer
30681 \begin_inset Argument 1
30684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30706 \begin_layout Section
30707 Customized Page Headers and Footers
30708 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30710 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
30715 \begin_inset Index idx
30718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30719 Document ! Header/Footer line
30725 \begin_inset Index idx
30728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30737 \begin_layout Standard
30738 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
30742 \begin_inset space ~
30753 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30759 \begin_inset space ~
30765 As a second step add in the menu
30767 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30768 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30772 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30775 Custom Header/Footerlines
30776 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30780 This module offers the following 6
30781 \begin_inset space ~
30787 \begin_layout Description
30789 \begin_inset space ~
30793 \begin_inset space ~
30797 \begin_inset space ~
30801 \begin_inset space ~
30805 \begin_inset space ~
30811 \begin_layout Description
30813 \begin_inset space ~
30817 \begin_inset space ~
30821 \begin_inset space ~
30825 \begin_inset space ~
30829 \begin_inset space ~
30835 \begin_layout Standard
30836 for the different positions in the header/footer.
30839 \begin_layout Standard
30840 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
30841 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
30843 \begin_inset space ~
30847 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30849 reference "fig:Page-layout"
30853 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
30856 \begin_layout Standard
30857 \begin_inset Float figure
30863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30866 \begin_inset Tabular
30867 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
30868 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
30869 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30870 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30871 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30873 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
30885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30891 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30902 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30920 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30931 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
30934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30935 The normal text on the page goes here.
30936 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
30938 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
30939 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
30944 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30953 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30964 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30982 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30993 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
31005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31011 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31029 \begin_inset Caption Standard
31031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31032 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31034 name "fig:Page-layout"
31038 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
31051 \begin_layout Standard
31052 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31060 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
31064 \begin_inset space ~
31069 is set to “Default”.
31070 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
31079 \begin_layout Subsection
31083 \begin_layout Standard
31084 To define your header line, add all three header styles.
31085 The things you add to the styles appear on odd numbered pages, the things
31086 in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
31087 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
31089 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
31090 Defining the footer line works similarly.
31093 \begin_layout Standard
31094 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
31095 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
31099 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31101 \begin_inset space ~
31109 \begin_layout Description
31112 thepage prints the current page number
31115 \begin_layout Description
31118 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
31121 \begin_layout Description
31124 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
31127 \begin_layout Description
31130 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
31131 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
31134 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31138 \begin_inset Quotes prd
31141 because it usually goes in a left header.
31144 \begin_layout Description
31147 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
31148 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
31150 It is normally used in the right header.
31153 \begin_layout Subsection
31154 Default header/footer
31157 \begin_layout Standard
31158 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
31159 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
31160 footer has the page number.
31161 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
31162 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
31163 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
31166 \begin_inset space ~
31174 \begin_layout Subsection
31178 \begin_layout Standard
31179 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
31180 Some pages are different.
31181 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
31182 a new part or chapter in your book.
31183 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
31184 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
31185 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
31188 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31189 Header and footer decoration line
31192 \begin_layout Standard
31193 By default, you get a 0.4
31194 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31197 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
31198 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
31210 in the following way:
31213 \begin_layout Standard
31220 headrulewidth}{thickness}
31223 \begin_layout Standard
31224 where thickness is a size in standard units like
31233 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
31234 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31240 \begin_layout Standard
31241 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31243 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in sec.
31244 \begin_inset space ~
31248 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31257 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31258 Several header/footer lines
31261 \begin_layout Standard
31262 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
31263 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
31264 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
31266 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31281 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31282 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31295 \begin_inset space ~
31303 \begin_layout Standard
31310 headheight}{height}
31313 \begin_layout Standard
31314 where height is a size in standard units.
31315 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
31316 your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
31317 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31318 logfile with the menu
31320 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31326 \begin_inset space ~
31331 to see if you can find a warning about the package
31336 \begin_inset Index idx
31339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31341 -packages ! fancyhdr
31347 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
31348 for your header/footer.
31351 \begin_layout Subsection
31355 \begin_layout Standard
31356 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
31357 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
31358 This example consists of the following definition:
31361 \begin_layout Description
31363 \begin_inset space ~
31372 , empty optional argument
31375 \begin_layout Description
31377 \begin_inset space ~
31380 Header empty, empty optional argument
31383 \begin_layout Description
31385 \begin_inset space ~
31394 in the optional argument
31397 \begin_layout Description
31399 \begin_inset space ~
31408 in the optional argument
31411 \begin_layout Description
31413 \begin_inset space ~
31426 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31430 \begin_inset Newline newline
31434 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31438 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31441 in the optional argument
31444 \begin_layout Description
31446 \begin_inset space ~
31455 , empty optional argument
31458 \begin_layout Description
31461 headrulewidth set to 2
31462 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31468 \begin_layout Standard
31469 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
31470 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
31476 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31485 \begin_layout Standard
31486 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
31492 \begin_layout Standard
31496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31500 pagestyle{headings}
31506 \begin_inset Note Note
31509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31510 switches back to page style with the default headings
31518 \begin_layout Section
31519 Previewing Snippets of your Document
31520 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31522 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
31527 \begin_inset Index idx
31530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31537 \begin_inset Index idx
31540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31549 \begin_layout Standard
31551 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
31552 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
31553 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
31556 \begin_layout Subsection
31560 \begin_layout Standard
31561 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31567 \begin_inset Index idx
31570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31572 -packages ! preview-latex
31577 (on some systems named simply
31582 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
31584 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31590 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31592 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
31600 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
31601 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31602 -package are automatically
31603 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
31607 \begin_layout Subsection
31611 \begin_layout Standard
31612 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
31613 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31615 activate the option
31618 \begin_inset space ~
31625 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31631 \begin_inset space ~
31635 \begin_inset space ~
31638 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
31645 \begin_inset space ~
31658 \begin_inset space ~
31663 is the multiplication factor for the size.
31666 \begin_layout Standard
31667 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31672 \begin_inset space ~
31680 \begin_inset space ~
31688 \begin_layout Standard
31689 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
31690 and when you finish
31694 \begin_layout Standard
31695 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31703 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
31704 generated by activating the option
31707 \begin_inset space ~
31713 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
31721 \begin_layout Subsection
31722 Selected document parts
31725 \begin_layout Standard
31726 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
31727 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
31728 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
31729 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
31731 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
31733 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31737 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
31738 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
31739 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
31742 \begin_layout Standard
31743 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31750 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
31755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31762 is explained in section
31764 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
31769 \begin_inset space ~
31779 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
31780 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
31781 the final rotated boxes,
31782 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
31783 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
31785 Here is the result:
31788 \begin_layout Standard
31789 \begin_inset Preview
31791 \begin_layout Standard
31796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31800 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
31806 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
31816 height_special "totalheight"
31821 backgroundcolor "none"
31824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31849 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
31855 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
31862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31877 \begin_layout Standard
31878 Previewing works also for colors.
31879 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31898 is explained in section
31905 \begin_inset space ~
31918 \begin_layout Standard
31919 \begin_inset Preview
31921 \begin_layout Standard
31925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31944 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
31949 This is text within a colored, framed box.
31953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31968 \begin_layout Standard
31969 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
31975 \begin_layout Standard
31976 If \SpecialChar LyX
31977 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
31978 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
31979 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
31980 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31981 packages in your document preamble that are required by
31982 the \SpecialChar TeX
31984 If \SpecialChar LyX
31985 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
31986 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
31988 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
31989 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
31990 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
31993 \begin_layout Subsection
31998 \begin_layout Standard
31999 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32000 source of the whole document or parts of it.
32003 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
32005 \begin_inset space ~
32010 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32012 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
32014 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
32015 's main window, then only this selection
32016 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
32017 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
32018 the source view window.
32023 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
32024 ; but note that if you have
32025 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
32027 not just the one which is open at the time.
32030 \begin_layout Section
32031 Advanced Find and Replace
32032 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32034 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
32039 \begin_inset Index idx
32042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32049 \begin_inset Index idx
32052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32061 \begin_layout Subsection
32065 \begin_layout Standard
32066 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
32067 allows for searching of complex,
32068 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
32070 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
32071 The key-features are:
32074 \begin_layout Itemize
32075 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
32076 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
32077 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
32081 \begin_layout Itemize
32082 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
32083 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
32084 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
32085 a section heading will only be found within section headings
32088 \begin_layout Itemize
32089 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
32090 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
32091 outside of mathematics environments
32094 \begin_layout Itemize
32095 Search may be widened to a specific
32100 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32104 \begin_inset space ~
32107 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
32108 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
32115 \begin_layout Itemize
32116 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
32117 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
32118 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32122 \begin_inset space ~
32125 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
32128 \begin_layout Subsection
32132 \begin_layout Standard
32133 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
32135 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32148 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
32151 ) or the toolbar button
32154 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
32160 Advanced Find and Replace
32165 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32169 \begin_layout Standard
32175 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
32179 \begin_inset space ~
32184 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
32187 arg "paragraph-break"
32191 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
32192 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
32196 arg "paragraph-break"
32199 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
32203 searches backwards.
32206 \begin_layout Standard
32210 \begin_inset space ~
32215 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
32224 \begin_inset space ~
32229 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
32232 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32233 Searching for mathematics
32236 \begin_layout Standard
32237 Mathematical formulas, such as
32238 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
32241 or something more complex like
32242 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
32245 , may be searched for by typing them in the
32250 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
32251 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
32252 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
32253 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
32259 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32263 \begin_layout Standard
32264 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
32265 This is done by switching to the
32269 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
32274 This way, entering in the
32281 \begin_layout Itemize
32282 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
32283 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
32286 \begin_layout Itemize
32287 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
32288 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
32291 \begin_layout Itemize
32292 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
32293 of it only within section headings.
32294 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
32295 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
32299 \begin_layout Itemize
32300 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
32301 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
32304 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32308 \begin_layout Standard
32309 The entries made in the
32313 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
32316 \begin_inset space ~
32322 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
32326 button or alternatively press
32329 arg "paragraph-break"
32336 while the cursor is in the
32339 \begin_inset space ~
32347 \begin_layout Standard
32348 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
32350 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
32354 \begin_layout Itemize
32355 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
32356 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
32357 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32361 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32364 with its typewriter version
32365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32379 \begin_layout Itemize
32380 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
32382 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32386 \begin_inset Formula $R$
32390 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32394 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32398 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
32402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32405 (you may want to enable the
32408 \begin_inset space ~
32416 \begin_inset space ~
32421 options and disable the
32429 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
32430 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32437 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
32438 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
32442 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
32445 , or occurrences of
32446 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
32450 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
32456 \begin_layout Subsection
32460 \begin_layout Standard
32461 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
32465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32466 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
32468 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32470 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
32479 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
32485 This is done with the context menu
32487 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32488 Insert Regular Expression
32490 while the cursor is in the
32495 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
32496 expression matching rules
32500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32501 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
32504 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32508 \begin_inset space ~
32511 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
32512 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
32518 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
32519 same text in the document.
32520 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
32521 Examples of using such a feature may be:
32524 \begin_layout Enumerate
32525 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
32530 editor the fraction
32531 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
32535 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32538 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
32539 fractions with the given denominator.
32542 \begin_layout Enumerate
32543 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
32555 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32560 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
32561 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
32562 Also, by inserting a
32563 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32566 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
32567 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
32570 \begin_layout Standard
32571 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
32572 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
32573 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32576 , and referring back to them through
32577 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32581 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
32585 For example, try searching with the regexp
32586 \begin_inset Newline newline
32589 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
32592 \begin_inset Newline newline
32595 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
32598 \begin_layout Standard
32599 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
32602 \begin_layout Standard
32603 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32611 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
32612 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
32613 sub-expressions is absolute.
32615 \begin_inset space ~
32619 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32622 always refers to the first occurrence of
32623 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32626 in all entered regexps.
32634 \begin_layout Section
32636 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32638 name "sec:Spellchecking"
32643 \begin_inset Index idx
32646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32655 \begin_layout Standard
32657 has a built-in spell checker.
32660 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32667 key or the toolbar button
32670 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
32673 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
32674 beginning of the currently selected text.
32675 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
32676 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
32677 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
32678 scrolled so that it is visible.
32679 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
32680 n, if any could be found.
32681 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
32685 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
32686 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
32689 \begin_layout Standard
32690 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
32693 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32697 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
32698 a different one at the top of the dialog.
32700 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
32701 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
32704 \begin_inset space ~
32712 arg "dialog-show character"
32715 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
32717 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
32720 \begin_layout Standard
32721 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
32722 can be downloaded from here:
32723 \begin_inset Newline newline
32727 \begin_inset Flex URL
32730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32732 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
32738 \begin_inset Newline newline
32742 \begin_inset space ~
32745 files for each language.
32746 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
32747 \begin_inset space ~
32750 files into \SpecialChar LyX
32751 's installation subfolder
32759 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
32761 \begin_inset Newline newline
32764 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
32765 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
32766 but in most cases these are
32782 is the language code.
32785 \begin_layout Subsection
32789 \begin_layout Standard
32792 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32793 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32795 \begin_inset space ~
32798 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32801 you can set the following things:
32804 \begin_layout Description
32806 \begin_inset space ~
32809 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
32810 should use for spell checking.
32811 Depending on your platform,
32825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32826 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
32827 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
32842 \begin_inset space ~
32845 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
32848 \begin_layout Description
32850 \begin_inset space ~
32853 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
32854 will always use the given language
32855 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
32858 \begin_layout Description
32860 \begin_inset space ~
32863 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
32865 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32869 \begin_inset space \space{}
32873 This should normally not be needed.
32876 \begin_layout Description
32878 \begin_inset space ~
32882 \begin_inset space ~
32885 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
32887 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32897 \begin_layout Description
32899 \begin_inset space ~
32902 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
32903 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
32904 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
32905 appear in a context menu.
32906 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
32910 \begin_layout Description
32912 \begin_inset space ~
32916 \begin_inset space ~
32920 \begin_inset space ~
32923 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
32927 \begin_layout Section
32929 \begin_inset Index idx
32932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32939 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32941 name "sec:Thesaurus"
32948 \begin_layout Standard
32950 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
32951 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
32960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32961 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32963 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
32972 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
32974 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
32975 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
32976 which are available for many languages.
32979 \begin_layout Standard
32980 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
32981 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
32985 \begin_layout Subsection
32986 Setting up the thesaurus
32989 \begin_layout Standard
32998 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
33002 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
33007 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
33009 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33013 \begin_inset space ~
33021 For instance, the US English files are named:
33024 \begin_layout Itemize
33028 \begin_layout Itemize
33032 \begin_layout Standard
33041 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
33042 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
33045 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33046 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33047 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33049 \begin_inset space ~
33054 ) to the path where they are installed.
33058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33059 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
33060 ies, typical locations are
33066 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
33070 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
33074 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
33077 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
33083 LibreOffice-<Version>
33090 On the Mac, the default location is
33092 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
33093 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33094 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
33095 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
33096 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33097 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33105 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
33106 during the \SpecialChar LyX
33107 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
33111 \begin_layout Standard
33112 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
33113 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
33117 \begin_layout Itemize
33118 \begin_inset Flex URL
33121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33123 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
33131 \begin_layout Standard
33132 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
33133 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
33135 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33136 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33137 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33139 \begin_inset space ~
33144 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
33146 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
33147 and point \SpecialChar LyX
33151 \begin_layout Standard
33152 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
33154 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33157 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
33163 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
33166 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
33167 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
33169 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33175 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33176 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33177 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33179 \begin_inset space ~
33184 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
33187 \begin_layout Subsection
33188 Using the thesaurus
33191 \begin_layout Standard
33192 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
33194 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33197 or the toolbar button
33200 arg "thesaurus-entry"
33203 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
33205 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
33207 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
33208 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
33209 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
33218 ), related terms (such as
33221 \begin_inset space ~
33230 ), compounds (such as
33233 \begin_inset space ~
33242 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
33251 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
33254 \begin_layout Standard
33255 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
33256 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
33260 \begin_layout Standard
33261 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
33262 the dictionary, such as the above
33266 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
33267 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33271 \begin_inset space \space{}
33274 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
33275 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
33276 For example, looking up the word form
33280 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
33285 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
33286 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33290 \begin_inset space \space{}
33301 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
33302 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
33303 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
33306 \begin_layout Section
33308 \begin_inset Index idx
33311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33318 \begin_inset Index idx
33321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33322 Document ! Change Tracking
33328 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33330 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
33337 \begin_layout Standard
33338 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
33339 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
33340 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
33341 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
33343 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33345 \begin_inset space ~
33348 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33350 \begin_inset space ~
33358 \begin_layout Standard
33359 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
33373 The color depends on the author that made the change.
33374 You can change the color in
33376 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33377 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33379 \begin_inset space ~
33383 \begin_inset space ~
33388 \SpecialChar menuseparator
33394 \begin_inset Index idx
33397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33398 Color ! Change tracking
33403 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
33404 's status bar when the
33405 cursor is in changed text.
33406 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
33409 arg "changes-merge"
33415 \begin_layout Standard
33416 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
33418 \begin_inset Index idx
33421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33430 \begin_layout Standard
33431 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33437 \begin_layout Standard
33438 \begin_inset Graphics
33439 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
33447 \begin_layout Standard
33448 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33454 \begin_layout Standard
33455 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
33458 \begin_layout Standard
33459 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33465 \begin_layout Standard
33466 \begin_inset Tabular
33467 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
33468 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
33469 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33470 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33471 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33480 arg "changes-track"
33488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33494 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33496 \begin_inset space ~
33499 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33501 \begin_inset space ~
33510 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33519 arg "changes-output"
33527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33533 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33535 \begin_inset space ~
33538 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33540 \begin_inset space ~
33544 \begin_inset space ~
33548 \begin_inset space ~
33557 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33578 Jumps to the next change
33584 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33593 arg "change-accept"
33601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33607 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33609 \begin_inset space ~
33612 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33614 \begin_inset space ~
33623 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33632 arg "change-reject"
33640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33646 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33648 \begin_inset space ~
33651 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33653 \begin_inset space ~
33662 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33671 arg "changes-merge"
33679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33685 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33687 \begin_inset space ~
33690 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33692 \begin_inset space ~
33701 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33710 arg "all-changes-accept"
33718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33724 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33726 \begin_inset space ~
33729 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33731 \begin_inset space ~
33735 \begin_inset space ~
33744 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33753 arg "all-changes-reject"
33761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33767 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33769 \begin_inset space ~
33772 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33774 \begin_inset space ~
33778 \begin_inset space ~
33787 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33810 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33811 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
33813 \begin_inset space ~
33822 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33845 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
33847 \begin_inset space ~
33863 \begin_layout Standard
33864 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33870 \begin_layout Standard
33871 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
33891 \begin_layout Standard
33892 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
33893 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
33894 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
33895 the next change after the current cursor position.
33896 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
33897 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
33898 step to the next change.
33899 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
33902 \begin_layout Standard
33903 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
33904 to describe a change.
33907 \begin_layout Standard
33908 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33914 \begin_inset Index idx
33917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33919 -packages ! dvipost
33925 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
33927 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33933 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
33937 \begin_layout Section
33938 Comparison of Documents
33939 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33941 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
33946 \begin_inset Index idx
33949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33950 Comparison of documents
33958 \begin_layout Standard
33959 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
33962 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33966 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
33967 file with change tracking enabled showing the
33969 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
33971 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
33975 \begin_inset space ~
33979 \begin_inset space ~
33983 \begin_inset space ~
33992 \begin_inset space ~
33996 \begin_inset space ~
34000 \begin_inset space ~
34004 \begin_inset space ~
34008 \begin_inset space ~
34012 \begin_inset space ~
34017 enables the change tracking option
34020 \begin_inset space ~
34024 \begin_inset space ~
34028 \begin_inset space ~
34033 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
34036 \begin_layout Section
34037 International Support
34038 \begin_inset Index idx
34041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34042 International support
34050 \begin_layout Standard
34051 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
34052 with any language you want.
34053 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
34054 up \SpecialChar LyX
34056 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34058 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
34065 \begin_layout Standard
34066 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
34067 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
34068 \begin_inset space ~
34072 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34074 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
34081 \begin_layout Subsection
34083 \begin_inset Index idx
34086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34093 \begin_inset Index idx
34096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34097 Document ! Settings
34103 \begin_inset Index idx
34106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34107 Document ! Language
34115 \begin_layout Standard
34118 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34119 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34122 dialog lets you set
34124 the language, the quote style and character encoding
34129 \begin_layout Standard
34134 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
34139 \begin_inset space ~
34144 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
34145 For details about the different encoding options see section
34146 \begin_inset space ~
34150 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34152 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
34159 \begin_layout Subsection
34160 Keyboard mapping configuration
34161 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34163 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
34170 \begin_layout Standard
34171 If you have for example a U.
34172 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34175 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
34176 can use an alternate keymap.
34177 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
34182 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34183 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34184 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
34187 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
34188 \begin_inset space ~
34192 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34194 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
34199 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
34200 which one you want to use.
34203 \begin_layout Standard
34204 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
34205 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
34206 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
34207 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34210 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
34211 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
34212 one to support the characters you want.
34213 This and many other customizations are explained in the
34220 \begin_layout Chapter
34223 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34225 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
34232 \begin_layout Standard
34233 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
34234 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
34235 topic inside the user's guide.
34238 \begin_layout Section
34240 \begin_inset Index idx
34243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34252 \begin_layout Standard
34257 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
34260 \begin_layout Subsection
34264 \begin_layout Standard
34265 Creates a new document.
34268 \begin_layout Subsection
34272 \begin_layout Standard
34273 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
34274 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
34275 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
34278 \begin_layout Subsection
34282 \begin_layout Standard
34286 \begin_layout Subsection
34290 \begin_layout Standard
34291 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
34292 Click there on a file to open it.
34295 \begin_layout Subsection
34299 \begin_layout Standard
34300 Closes the current document.
34303 \begin_layout Subsection
34307 \begin_layout Standard
34308 Closes all opened documents.
34311 \begin_layout Subsection
34315 \begin_layout Standard
34316 Saves the actual document.
34319 \begin_layout Subsection
34323 \begin_layout Standard
34324 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
34327 \begin_layout Subsection
34331 \begin_layout Standard
34332 Saves all opened documents.
34335 \begin_layout Subsection
34339 \begin_layout Standard
34340 Reloads the actual document from disk.
34343 \begin_layout Subsection
34347 \begin_layout Standard
34348 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
34349 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
34350 It is described in the section
34352 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
34357 Additional Features
34362 \begin_layout Subsection
34366 \begin_layout Standard
34367 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
34368 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
34370 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
34371 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
34375 \begin_layout Standard
34376 When using the menu entry
34379 \begin_inset space ~
34384 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
34388 \begin_inset space ~
34392 \begin_inset space ~
34396 \begin_inset space ~
34401 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
34402 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
34405 \begin_layout Subsection
34407 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34409 name "subsec:Export"
34416 \begin_layout Standard
34417 You can export your document to various file formats.
34418 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
34420 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
34421 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
34422 during its configuration.
34425 \begin_layout Standard
34426 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
34428 \begin_inset space ~
34432 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34434 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
34441 \begin_layout Description
34447 \begin_inset space ~
34450 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
34452 \begin_inset space ~
34455 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
34456 \begin_inset Newline newline
34459 Since \SpecialChar LyX
34460 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
34464 \begin_layout Description
34465 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
34471 \begin_layout Description
34473 \begin_inset space ~
34476 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
34482 \begin_layout Description
34483 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
34484 's native DVI-format.
34485 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
34486 files paths or file names in your document.
34488 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
34495 \begin_layout Description
34496 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
34497 in files paths or file names
34500 \begin_layout Description
34502 \begin_inset space ~
34509 ) DVI-format using the program
34511 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34514 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
34518 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34526 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
34534 \begin_layout Description
34536 \begin_inset space ~
34539 (cropped) the same as
34543 but with cropped page margins.
34546 \begin_layout Description
34548 \begin_inset space ~
34551 Dot text file with code in the programming language
34555 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
34560 \begin_layout Description
34564 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34572 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
34580 \begin_layout Description
34582 \begin_inset space ~
34586 \begin_inset space ~
34589 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
34593 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
34601 \begin_layout Description
34605 \begin_inset space ~
34614 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34615 source that is compilable with the program
34617 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34621 \begin_layout Description
34625 \begin_inset space ~
34630 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34631 source, additionally all images used in the document
34632 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
34636 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
34639 \begin_layout Description
34643 \begin_inset space ~
34648 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34649 source code, additionally all images used in the document
34650 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
34658 \begin_layout Description
34662 \begin_inset space ~
34671 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34672 source that is compilable with the program
34678 \begin_layout Description
34680 \begin_inset space ~
34684 \begin_inset space ~
34691 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34692 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
34698 \begin_layout Description
34700 \begin_inset space ~
34703 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
34704 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
34706 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34710 \begin_inset space \space{}
34715 \begin_inset space ~
34719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34723 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34727 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34731 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34734 represent the version number)
34737 \begin_layout Description
34739 \begin_inset space ~
34743 \begin_inset space ~
34746 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
34747 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
34748 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34752 \begin_layout Description
34753 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
34754 's internal XHTML engine
34757 \begin_layout Description
34758 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
34763 \begin_layout Description
34764 OpenDocument OpenDocument-formatted file, to be opened with
34766 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
34769 (The OpenDocument-converter is a third-party product and may not work in
34773 \begin_layout Description
34775 \begin_inset space ~
34778 (cropped) the same as
34781 \begin_inset space ~
34786 but with cropped page margins
34789 \begin_layout Description
34793 \begin_inset space ~
34798 PDF-format using the program
34802 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34805 \begin_layout Description
34809 \begin_inset space ~
34813 \begin_inset space ~
34821 \begin_inset space ~
34826 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
34827 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34831 \begin_inset space \space{}
34834 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
34838 \begin_layout Description
34842 \begin_inset space ~
34847 PDF-format using the program
34849 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34852 , produces PDF-files directly
34855 \begin_layout Description
34859 \begin_inset space ~
34864 PDF-format using the program
34868 , produces PDF-files directly
34871 \begin_layout Description
34875 \begin_inset space ~
34880 PDF-format using the program
34884 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34887 \begin_layout Description
34891 \begin_inset space ~
34896 PDF-format using the program
34901 , produces PDF-files directly
34904 \begin_layout Description
34908 \begin_inset space ~
34916 \begin_layout Description
34920 \begin_inset space ~
34924 \begin_inset space ~
34929 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
34930 and then exported as text using the program
34935 \begin_layout Description
34940 PostScript format using the program
34945 \begin_layout Description
34946 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34947 source and also code in the statistical programming
34961 it is possible to use
34965 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
34969 \begin_layout Standard
34970 If one of the menu entries
34977 \begin_inset space ~
34986 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34988 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
34990 \begin_inset space ~
34994 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34996 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
35001 \begin_inset Index idx
35004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35005 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
35014 \begin_layout Subsection
35018 \begin_layout Standard
35019 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
35020 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
35023 \begin_inset space ~
35027 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35029 reference "sec:Paths"
35034 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
35043 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
35044 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
35045 's preferences as described in section
35046 \begin_inset space ~
35050 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35052 reference "subsec:Converters"
35059 \begin_layout Subsection
35060 New and Close Window
35063 \begin_layout Standard
35064 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
35068 \begin_layout Subsection
35072 \begin_layout Standard
35073 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
35076 \begin_layout Section
35078 \begin_inset Index idx
35081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35090 \begin_layout Subsection
35094 \begin_layout Standard
35095 Described in section
35096 \begin_inset space ~
35100 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35102 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
35109 \begin_layout Subsection
35110 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
35113 \begin_layout Standard
35114 Described in section
35115 \begin_inset space ~
35119 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35121 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35128 \begin_layout Subsection
35132 \begin_layout Standard
35133 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
35134 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
35137 \begin_layout Subsection
35141 \begin_layout Standard
35142 Selects the whole document.
35145 \begin_layout Subsection
35146 Find & Replace (Quick)
35149 \begin_layout Standard
35150 Described in section
35151 \begin_inset space ~
35155 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35157 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35164 \begin_layout Subsection
35165 Find & Replace (Advanced)
35168 \begin_layout Standard
35169 Described in section
35170 \begin_inset space ~
35174 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35176 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
35183 \begin_layout Subsection
35184 Move Paragraph Up/Down
35187 \begin_layout Standard
35188 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
35192 \begin_layout Subsection
35196 \begin_layout Standard
35197 Described in section
35198 \begin_inset space ~
35202 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35204 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
35211 \begin_layout Subsection
35213 \begin_inset Index idx
35216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35217 Paragraph ! Settings
35225 \begin_layout Standard
35226 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
35227 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
35231 \begin_layout Standard
35232 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
35233 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
35239 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35240 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35242 \begin_inset space ~
35250 \begin_layout Subsection
35254 \begin_layout Standard
35255 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside a table.
35256 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
35257 of a cell and to set the vertical alignment of the cell.Table Settings and
35261 \begin_layout Standard
35262 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
35264 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
35265 The properties of tables are described in section
35266 \begin_inset space ~
35270 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35272 reference "sec:Tables"
35276 , the properties of formulas in chapter
35277 \begin_inset space ~
35281 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35283 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35290 \begin_layout Subsection
35291 Increase/Decrease List Depth
35294 \begin_layout Standard
35295 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
35297 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
35298 \begin_inset space ~
35302 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35304 reference "sec:Nesting"
35309 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35311 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
35318 \begin_layout Subsection
35321 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
35324 \begin_layout Standard
35325 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
35326 nts of the same type.
35328 \begin_inset space ~
35332 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35334 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
35338 for an explanation.
35341 \begin_layout Section
35343 \begin_inset Index idx
35346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35355 \begin_layout Standard
35356 At the bottom of the
35360 menu the opened documents are listed.
35363 \begin_layout Subsection
35364 Open/Close all Insets
35367 \begin_layout Standard
35368 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
35371 \begin_layout Subsection
35372 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
35375 \begin_layout Standard
35376 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
35379 \begin_layout Standard
35380 Math macros are described in the
35387 \begin_layout Subsection
35391 \begin_layout Standard
35392 Shows the outline window as described in sections
35393 \begin_inset space ~
35397 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35399 reference "sec:Navigating"
35404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35406 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
35413 \begin_layout Subsection
35417 \begin_layout Standard
35418 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
35420 \begin_inset space ~
35424 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35426 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35433 \begin_layout Subsection
35437 \begin_layout Standard
35438 Opens a window showing console messages.
35439 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
35441 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35444 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
35445 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
35446 is processing the document.
35449 \begin_layout Subsection
35451 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35453 name "subsec:Toolbars"
35458 \begin_inset Index idx
35461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35470 \begin_layout Standard
35471 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
35472 All toolbars and the
35475 \begin_inset space ~
35480 can be turned on and off.
35485 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
35497 \begin_inset space ~
35509 \begin_inset space ~
35514 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
35518 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
35525 \begin_layout Standard
35530 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
35534 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
35535 or when a certain feature is enabled.
35536 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
35537 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
35538 is inside a formula or table respectively.
35541 \begin_layout Standard
35543 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
35544 \begin_inset space ~
35548 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35550 reference "sec:Toolbars"
35557 \begin_layout Subsection
35561 \begin_layout Standard
35565 \begin_inset space ~
35569 \begin_inset space ~
35573 \begin_inset space ~
35577 \begin_inset space ~
35581 \begin_inset space ~
35585 \begin_inset space ~
35590 will split \SpecialChar LyX
35591 's main window vertically while
35594 \begin_inset space ~
35598 \begin_inset space ~
35602 \begin_inset space ~
35606 \begin_inset space ~
35610 \begin_inset space ~
35614 \begin_inset space ~
35619 will split it horizontally.
35620 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
35621 to view the same document, but at different positions.
35622 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
35623 three or more documents at the same time.
35624 To close a split view, use the menu
35627 \begin_inset space ~
35631 \begin_inset space ~
35639 \begin_layout Subsection
35643 \begin_layout Standard
35644 Closes a split view.
35647 \begin_layout Subsection
35651 \begin_layout Standard
35652 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
35653 so that you will see nothing but your text.
35654 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
35655 's main window fullscreen.
35656 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
35657 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
35660 \begin_layout Section
35662 \begin_inset Index idx
35665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35674 \begin_layout Subsection
35678 \begin_layout Standard
35679 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
35680 \begin_inset space ~
35684 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35686 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35697 \begin_layout Subsection
35699 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35701 name "subsec:Special-Character"
35708 \begin_layout Standard
35709 Here you can insert the following characters:
35712 \begin_layout Description
35717 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
35720 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
35721 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35722 -packages you have installed.
35723 You can get a complete display by checking
35726 \begin_inset space ~
35732 \begin_inset Newline newline
35736 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35744 Not all characters will be visible in the
35748 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
35750 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35754 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35756 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
35760 ) can display every character.
35768 \begin_layout Description
35769 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
35773 \begin_layout Description
35775 \begin_inset space ~
35779 \begin_inset space ~
35782 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
35783 \begin_inset space ~
35787 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35789 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
35796 \begin_layout Description
35798 \begin_inset space ~
35801 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
35804 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35805 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35811 \begin_layout Description
35813 \begin_inset space ~
35816 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
35819 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35820 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35826 \begin_layout Description
35828 \begin_inset space ~
35831 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
35835 \begin_layout Description
35837 \begin_inset space ~
35840 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
35844 \begin_layout Description
35846 \begin_inset space ~
35849 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
35855 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
35861 \begin_layout Description
35863 \begin_inset space ~
35866 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
35870 \begin_layout Description
35872 \begin_inset space ~
35876 \begin_inset Index idx
35879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35886 \begin_inset Index idx
35889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35890 Language ! Phonetic symbols
35895 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
35896 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
35898 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35904 \begin_inset Index idx
35907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35915 \begin_inset Newline newline
35918 More information about this feature can be found in the
35924 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
35930 \begin_layout Subsection
35934 \begin_layout Standard
35935 Opens a submenu with the following options:
35938 \begin_layout Description
35939 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
35940 \begin_inset script superscript
35942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35951 \begin_layout Description
35952 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
35953 \begin_inset script subscript
35955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35964 \begin_layout Description
35966 \begin_inset space ~
35969 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
35970 \begin_inset space ~
35974 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35976 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
35983 \begin_layout Description
35985 \begin_inset space ~
35988 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
35989 \begin_inset space ~
35993 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35995 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
36002 \begin_layout Description
36004 \begin_inset space ~
36007 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
36008 \begin_inset space ~
36012 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36014 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
36021 \begin_layout Description
36023 \begin_inset space ~
36026 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
36028 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36032 \begin_inset space \space{}
36035 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
36036 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
36042 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36045 To insert a fraction use the command
36050 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36054 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
36060 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36063 The visible space is hereby the character before the
36070 \begin_layout Description
36072 \begin_inset space ~
36075 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
36076 \begin_inset space ~
36080 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36082 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
36089 \begin_layout Description
36091 \begin_inset space ~
36094 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
36095 \begin_inset space ~
36099 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36101 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
36108 \begin_layout Description
36110 \begin_inset space ~
36113 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
36114 \begin_inset space ~
36118 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36120 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
36127 \begin_layout Description
36128 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
36129 \begin_inset space ~
36133 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36135 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
36142 \begin_layout Description
36144 \begin_inset space ~
36147 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
36148 \begin_inset space ~
36152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36154 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
36161 \begin_layout Description
36163 \begin_inset space ~
36166 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
36167 \begin_inset space ~
36171 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36173 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
36180 \begin_layout Description
36182 \begin_inset space ~
36186 \begin_inset space ~
36189 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
36190 \begin_inset space ~
36194 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36196 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36203 \begin_layout Description
36205 \begin_inset space ~
36208 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
36209 as described in section
36210 \begin_inset space ~
36214 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36216 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36223 \begin_layout Description
36225 \begin_inset space ~
36228 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
36229 \begin_inset space ~
36233 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36235 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36242 \begin_layout Description
36244 \begin_inset space ~
36247 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
36248 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
36250 \begin_inset space ~
36254 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36256 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36263 \begin_layout Description
36265 \begin_inset space ~
36268 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
36269 \begin_inset space ~
36273 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36275 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36282 \begin_layout Description
36284 \begin_inset space ~
36288 \begin_inset space ~
36291 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
36292 \begin_inset space ~
36296 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36298 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36305 \begin_layout Subsection
36309 \begin_layout Standard
36310 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
36314 \begin_inset space ~
36335 are described in section
36336 \begin_inset space ~
36340 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36342 reference "sec:toc"
36351 is described in section
36352 \begin_inset space ~
36356 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36358 reference "sec:Index"
36366 is described in section
36367 \begin_inset space ~
36371 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36373 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36379 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36382 is described in section
36383 \begin_inset space ~
36387 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36389 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
36396 \begin_layout Subsection
36400 \begin_layout Standard
36401 To insert floats, as described in section
36402 \begin_inset space ~
36406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36408 reference "sec:Floats"
36412 and in detail the chapter
36419 \begin_inset space ~
36427 \begin_layout Subsection
36431 \begin_layout Standard
36432 To insert notes, described in section
36433 \begin_inset space ~
36437 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36439 reference "sec:Notes"
36446 \begin_layout Subsection
36450 \begin_layout Standard
36451 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
36453 Branches are described in section
36454 \begin_inset space ~
36458 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36460 reference "sec:Branches"
36467 \begin_layout Subsection
36471 \begin_layout Standard
36472 Inserts document class-specific insets.
36473 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
36475 An example is the document class
36476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36483 with three custom insets.
36486 Flex insets and InsetLayout
36490 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
36496 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
36499 \begin_layout Subsection
36501 \begin_inset Index idx
36504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36513 \begin_layout Standard
36514 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
36516 For more information see chapter
36518 External Document Parts
36521 \begin_inset space ~
36527 \begin_layout Subsection
36529 \begin_inset Index idx
36532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36541 \begin_layout Standard
36542 Inserts a box in a certain style.
36543 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
36550 \begin_inset space ~
36558 \begin_layout Subsection
36562 \begin_layout Standard
36567 dialog as described in section
36568 \begin_inset space ~
36572 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36574 reference "sec:Bibliography"
36581 \begin_layout Subsection
36585 \begin_layout Standard
36590 as described in section
36591 \begin_inset space ~
36595 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36597 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36604 \begin_layout Subsection
36608 \begin_layout Standard
36613 as described in section
36614 \begin_inset space ~
36618 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36620 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36627 \begin_layout Subsection
36629 \begin_inset Index idx
36632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36639 \begin_inset Index idx
36642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36643 Longtables ! Caption
36651 \begin_layout Standard
36652 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
36653 Floats are described in section
36654 \begin_inset space ~
36658 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36660 reference "sec:Floats"
36664 ; captions in longtables are described in the section
36671 \begin_inset space ~
36679 \begin_layout Subsection
36683 \begin_layout Standard
36684 Inserts an index entry as described in section
36685 \begin_inset space ~
36689 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36691 reference "sec:Index"
36698 \begin_layout Subsection
36702 \begin_layout Standard
36703 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
36704 \begin_inset space ~
36708 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36710 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36717 \begin_layout Subsection
36721 \begin_layout Standard
36722 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
36723 Tables are described in section
36724 \begin_inset space ~
36728 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36730 reference "sec:Tables"
36734 and in detail in the chapter
36741 \begin_inset space ~
36749 \begin_layout Subsection
36753 \begin_layout Standard
36759 Graphics are described in section
36760 \begin_inset space ~
36764 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36766 reference "sec:Graphics"
36773 \begin_layout Subsection
36777 \begin_layout Standard
36778 Inserts a URL as described in section
36779 \begin_inset space ~
36783 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36785 reference "subsec:URLs"
36792 \begin_layout Subsection
36796 \begin_layout Standard
36797 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
36798 \begin_inset space ~
36802 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36804 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
36811 \begin_layout Subsection
36815 \begin_layout Standard
36816 Inserts a footnote as described in section
36817 \begin_inset space ~
36821 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36823 reference "sec:Footnotes"
36830 \begin_layout Subsection
36834 \begin_layout Standard
36835 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
36836 \begin_inset space ~
36840 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36842 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
36849 \begin_layout Subsection
36853 \begin_layout Standard
36854 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
36855 title or caption of a float.
36856 Inserts a short title as described in section
36857 \begin_inset space ~
36861 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36863 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
36870 \begin_layout Subsection
36875 \begin_layout Standard
36876 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
36877 Code box as described in section
36878 \begin_inset space ~
36882 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36884 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
36891 \begin_layout Subsection
36893 \begin_inset Index idx
36896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36905 \begin_layout Standard
36906 Inserts a program listings box.
36907 Program listings are explained in the chapter
36909 Program Code Listings
36914 \begin_inset space ~
36922 \begin_layout Subsection
36926 \begin_layout Standard
36927 Inserts the actual date.
36928 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
36932 offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
36940 \begin_inset space ~
36948 \begin_layout Subsection
36952 \begin_layout Standard
36953 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
36954 \begin_inset space ~
36958 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36960 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
36967 \begin_layout Section
36969 \begin_inset Index idx
36972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36981 \begin_layout Standard
36982 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
36983 \begin_inset space ~
36986 of the current document.
36987 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
36990 \begin_layout Subsection
36994 \begin_layout Standard
36995 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
36996 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
36997 to jump, for example, between section
36998 \begin_inset space ~
37002 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
37003 \begin_inset space ~
37006 2.5 and use the submenu
37009 \begin_inset space ~
37013 \begin_inset space ~
37020 \begin_inset space ~
37026 \begin_inset space ~
37030 \begin_inset space ~
37036 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
37040 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
37046 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
37049 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
37052 \begin_layout Standard
37053 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
37057 \begin_inset space ~
37062 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
37065 \begin_inset space ~
37070 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
37073 \begin_layout Subsection
37074 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
37077 \begin_layout Standard
37078 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
37082 \begin_layout Subsection
37086 \begin_layout Standard
37087 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
37088 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
37089 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
37093 \begin_inset space ~
37097 \begin_inset space ~
37105 \begin_layout Subsection
37109 \begin_layout Standard
37110 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
37113 The \SpecialChar LyX
37114 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
37116 \begin_inset space ~
37124 \begin_inset space ~
37129 manual for a detailed description.
37132 \begin_layout Section
37134 \begin_inset Index idx
37137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37146 \begin_layout Subsection
37150 \begin_layout Standard
37151 Change Tracking is described in section
37152 \begin_inset space ~
37156 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37158 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
37165 \begin_layout Subsection
37173 \begin_layout Standard
37174 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
37175 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
37176 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37178 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
37179 to the clipboard or update the view.
37180 With the help of the logfile experts can find in it reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
37184 \begin_layout Subsection
37185 Start Appendix Here
37188 \begin_layout Standard
37189 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
37190 as described in section
37191 \begin_inset space ~
37195 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37197 reference "sec:Appendices"
37204 \begin_layout Subsection
37206 \begin_inset space ~
37212 \begin_layout Standard
37213 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
37214 default output format for the document (menu
37216 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37217 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37218 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37220 \begin_inset space ~
37224 \begin_inset space ~
37230 \begin_inset space ~
37234 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37236 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37240 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
37243 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37244 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37246 \begin_inset space ~
37249 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37251 \begin_inset space ~
37254 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37256 \begin_inset space ~
37260 \begin_inset space ~
37266 \begin_inset space ~
37270 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37272 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37276 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
37277 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37279 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37280 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37282 \begin_inset space ~
37285 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37287 \begin_inset space ~
37290 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37294 \begin_inset space ~
37298 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37300 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37305 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37306 when it is first configured.
37307 The default output format is
37310 \begin_inset space ~
37318 \begin_layout Subsection
37319 View (Other Formats)
37322 \begin_layout Standard
37323 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
37324 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
37325 actual document with an external program.
37326 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
37327 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37328 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
37330 All possible formats are listed in section
37331 \begin_inset space ~
37335 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37337 reference "subsec:Export"
37342 You should at least see the menu entry
37347 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37349 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37351 \begin_inset space ~
37355 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37357 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37362 \begin_inset Index idx
37365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37366 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37375 \begin_layout Standard
37376 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
37377 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37379 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37380 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37382 \begin_inset space ~
37385 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37387 \begin_inset space ~
37390 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37394 \begin_inset space ~
37398 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37400 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37405 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37406 when it is first configured.
37409 \begin_layout Subsection
37411 \begin_inset space ~
37417 \begin_layout Standard
37418 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
37419 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
37422 \begin_layout Subsection
37423 Update (Other Formats)
37426 \begin_layout Standard
37427 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
37428 your document without opening a new viewer window.
37431 \begin_layout Subsection
37432 View Master Document
37435 \begin_layout Standard
37436 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37438 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37442 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37452 \begin_inset space ~
37457 manual for more information on this topic).
37458 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
37459 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
37463 \begin_inset space ~
37467 \begin_inset space ~
37472 generates the output of the whole book, while
37476 will just output the chapter alone.
37479 \begin_layout Standard
37480 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37481 in the document settings (menu
37483 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37484 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37485 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37487 \begin_inset space ~
37491 \begin_inset space ~
37497 \begin_inset space ~
37501 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37503 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37507 ) or in the preferences (menu
37509 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37510 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37512 \begin_inset space ~
37515 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37517 \begin_inset space ~
37520 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37522 \begin_inset space ~
37526 \begin_inset space ~
37532 \begin_inset space ~
37536 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37538 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37545 \begin_layout Subsection
37546 Update Master Document
37549 \begin_layout Standard
37550 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37552 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37556 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37566 \begin_inset space ~
37571 manual for more information on this topic).
37572 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
37573 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
37576 \begin_layout Standard
37577 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37578 in the document settings (menu
37580 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37581 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37582 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37584 \begin_inset space ~
37588 \begin_inset space ~
37594 \begin_inset space ~
37598 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37600 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37604 ) or in the preferences (menu
37606 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37607 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37609 \begin_inset space ~
37612 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37614 \begin_inset space ~
37617 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37619 \begin_inset space ~
37623 \begin_inset space ~
37629 \begin_inset space ~
37633 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37635 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37642 \begin_layout Subsection
37646 \begin_layout Standard
37647 Un/compresses the current document.
37650 \begin_layout Subsection
37654 \begin_layout Standard
37655 The document settings are described in appendix
37656 \begin_inset space ~
37660 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37662 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
37669 \begin_layout Section
37671 \begin_inset Index idx
37674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37683 \begin_layout Subsection
37687 \begin_layout Standard
37688 Spell checking is explained in section
37689 \begin_inset space ~
37693 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37695 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
37702 \begin_layout Subsection
37706 \begin_layout Standard
37707 The thesaurus is described in section
37708 \begin_inset space ~
37712 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37714 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
37721 \begin_layout Subsection
37723 \begin_inset Index idx
37726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37733 \begin_inset Index idx
37736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37745 \begin_layout Standard
37746 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
37747 the highlighted document part.
37750 \begin_layout Subsection
37756 \begin_inset Index idx
37759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37760 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
37769 \begin_layout Standard
37770 Generates with the help of the program
37772 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
37775 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
37776 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
37777 This feature is not available on Windows.
37780 \begin_layout Subsection
37786 \begin_inset Index idx
37789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37799 \begin_layout Standard
37800 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37805 \begin_inset space ~
37810 to see the full filename paths.
37813 \begin_layout Subsection
37815 \begin_inset Index idx
37818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37827 \begin_layout Standard
37828 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
37829 files as described in section
37830 \begin_inset space ~
37834 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37836 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
37843 \begin_layout Subsection
37845 \begin_inset Index idx
37848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37861 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37879 \begin_inset Index idx
37882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37883 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37892 \begin_layout Standard
37893 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
37894 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
37895 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
37896 -packages and programs it needs; see
37898 \begin_inset space ~
37902 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37904 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37911 \begin_layout Subsection
37915 \begin_layout Standard
37920 dialog as described in detail in appendix
37921 \begin_inset space ~
37925 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37927 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
37934 \begin_layout Section
37936 \begin_inset Index idx
37939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37948 \begin_layout Standard
37949 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
37950 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
37952 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
37956 \begin_layout Standard
37961 \begin_inset space ~
37966 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
37967 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37968 packages and classes found
37969 by \SpecialChar LyX
37971 \begin_inset space ~
37975 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37977 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
37984 \begin_layout Standard
37988 \begin_inset space ~
37993 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
37998 \begin_layout Section
38000 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38002 name "sec:Toolbars"
38009 \begin_layout Standard
38010 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
38011 \begin_inset space ~
38015 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38017 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
38024 \begin_layout Standard
38025 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
38026 This is described in the
38028 Additional Features
38033 \begin_layout Subsection
38035 \begin_inset Index idx
38038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38047 \begin_layout Standard
38048 \begin_inset Graphics
38049 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
38057 \begin_layout Standard
38058 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38064 \begin_layout Standard
38065 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38082 \begin_inset Note Note
38085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38086 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
38091 manual for more information.
38099 \begin_layout Standard
38100 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38106 \begin_layout Standard
38107 \begin_inset Tabular
38108 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
38109 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38110 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38111 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38117 \begin_inset Graphics
38118 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
38128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38132 pull-down box for the environments
38145 \begin_layout Standard
38146 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
38152 \begin_layout Standard
38154 \begin_inset Tabular
38155 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
38156 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38157 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38158 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38159 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38182 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38189 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38212 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38219 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38242 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38249 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38258 arg "dialog-show print"
38266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38272 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38279 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38288 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
38296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38302 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38309 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38332 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38339 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38362 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38369 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38392 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38399 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38422 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38429 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38452 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38459 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38468 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
38476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38482 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38484 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38488 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38492 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38501 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38508 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38522 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38524 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38528 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38532 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38541 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38550 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
38558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38564 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
38565 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
38572 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38593 Emphasize text, function of the
38595 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38597 \begin_inset space ~
38600 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38609 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38630 Set text to noun style, function of the
38632 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38634 \begin_inset space ~
38637 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38646 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38655 arg "textstyle-apply"
38663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38667 Format text using the current settings in the
38669 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38671 \begin_inset space ~
38674 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38683 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38706 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38707 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
38709 \begin_inset space ~
38718 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38727 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
38735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38741 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38748 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38755 arg "tabular-insert"
38763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38769 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38776 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38785 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
38793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38797 Toggle outline window on/off,
38799 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
38806 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38815 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
38823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38827 Toggle math toolbar on/off
38833 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38842 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
38850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38854 Toggle table toolbar on/off
38867 \begin_layout Subsection
38869 \begin_inset Index idx
38872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38881 \begin_layout Standard
38882 \begin_inset Graphics
38883 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
38891 \begin_layout Standard
38892 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38898 \begin_layout Standard
38899 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38903 \begin_layout Standard
38904 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38910 \begin_layout Standard
38911 \begin_inset Tabular
38912 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
38913 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38914 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38915 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38916 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38943 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38952 arg "layout Enumerate"
38960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38970 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38979 arg "layout Itemize"
38987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38997 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39024 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39033 arg "layout Description"
39041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39051 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39060 arg "depth-increment"
39068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39074 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39076 \begin_inset space ~
39080 \begin_inset space ~
39089 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39098 arg "depth-decrement"
39106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39112 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39114 \begin_inset space ~
39118 \begin_inset space ~
39127 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39136 arg "float-insert figure"
39144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39150 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39151 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39158 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39167 arg "float-insert table"
39175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39181 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39182 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39189 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39212 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39219 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39228 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
39236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39242 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39249 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39258 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
39266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39272 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39279 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39302 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39304 \begin_inset space ~
39313 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39322 arg "nomencl-insert"
39330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39336 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39338 \begin_inset space ~
39347 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39356 arg "footnote-insert"
39364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39370 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39377 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39386 arg "marginalnote-insert"
39394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39400 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39402 \begin_inset space ~
39411 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39434 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39435 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
39437 \begin_inset space ~
39446 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39455 arg "box-insert Frameless"
39463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39469 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39476 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39499 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39506 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39529 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39531 \begin_inset space ~
39540 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39549 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
39557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39563 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39564 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
39571 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39580 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
39588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39594 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39595 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
39597 \begin_inset space ~
39606 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39615 arg "dialog-show character"
39623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39629 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39631 \begin_inset space ~
39634 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39641 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39650 arg "layout-paragraph"
39658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39664 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39666 \begin_inset space ~
39675 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39684 arg "thesaurus-entry"
39692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39698 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39712 \begin_layout Subsection
39713 View/Update Toolbar
39714 \begin_inset Index idx
39717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39718 Toolbar ! View / Update
39726 \begin_layout Standard
39727 \begin_inset Graphics
39728 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
39735 \begin_layout Standard
39736 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39742 \begin_layout Standard
39743 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39747 \begin_layout Standard
39748 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39754 \begin_layout Standard
39755 \begin_inset Tabular
39756 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
39757 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39758 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39759 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39760 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39783 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39790 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39799 arg "buffer-update"
39807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39813 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39820 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39829 arg "master-buffer-view"
39837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39843 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39845 \begin_inset space ~
39854 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39863 arg "master-buffer-update"
39871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39877 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39879 \begin_inset space ~
39883 \begin_inset space ~
39892 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39901 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
39909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39915 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39916 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39917 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
39918 Synchronize with Output
39924 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39929 \begin_inset Graphics
39930 filename ../images/view-others.png
39932 groupId toolbarbuttons
39943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39949 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39950 View (Other Formats)
39956 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39961 \begin_inset Graphics
39962 filename ../images/update-others.png
39964 groupId toolbarbuttons
39973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39979 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39980 Update (Other Formats)
39993 \begin_layout Standard
39994 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
39998 \begin_layout Subsection
40002 \begin_layout Standard
40003 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
40004 \begin_inset space ~
40008 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40010 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40014 , the table toolbar
40015 \begin_inset Index idx
40018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40027 \begin_inset space ~
40032 manual and the math macro toolbar
40033 \begin_inset Index idx
40036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40049 \begin_layout Chapter
40050 The Document Settings
40051 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40053 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40058 \begin_inset Index idx
40061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40062 Document ! Settings
40070 \begin_layout Standard
40074 \begin_inset space ~
40079 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
40080 is called with the menu
40082 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40086 You can save your document settings as default with the
40088 Save as Document Defaults
40090 button in any dialog.
40091 This will create a template named
40095 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
40096 when you create a new document without
40100 \begin_layout Standard
40105 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
40106 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
40109 \begin_layout Standard
40110 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
40111 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
40112 to find the one you are looking for.
40113 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
40114 the submenus of the dialog.
40116 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40120 \begin_inset space \space{}
40124 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40128 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40131 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
40132 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
40133 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
40136 \begin_layout Section
40140 \begin_layout Standard
40141 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
40143 Document classes are described in section
40144 \begin_inset space ~
40148 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40150 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
40158 \begin_layout Standard
40162 \begin_inset space ~
40167 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
40172 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
40173 as a layout for a document class.
40174 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
40176 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
40185 \begin_layout Standard
40186 Some classes use special class options by default.
40187 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
40191 and you can decide to use them or not.
40192 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
40193 recommended you leave them untouched.
40198 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40199 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
40204 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40206 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
40211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40212 When you want to use one of the following drivers
40213 \begin_inset Newline newline
40218 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
40221 \begin_inset Newline newline
40224 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40225 distribution, see section
40230 \begin_inset CommandInset href
40232 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
40244 \begin_layout Standard
40249 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
40250 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
40251 in the background if the child document
40252 is opened without its master.
40253 This way child documents are always compilable.
40254 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
40261 \begin_inset space ~
40269 \begin_layout Standard
40270 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40281 \begin_inset Index idx
40284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40286 -packages ! prettyref
40292 \begin_inset Index idx
40295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40297 -packages ! refstyle
40302 for cross-references, see section
40303 \begin_inset space ~
40307 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40309 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40316 \begin_layout Section
40320 \begin_layout Standard
40321 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
40322 Please refer to the section
40325 \begin_inset space ~
40333 \begin_inset space ~
40338 manual for details.
40341 \begin_layout Section
40345 \begin_layout Standard
40346 Modules are explained in section
40347 \begin_inset space ~
40351 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40353 reference "subsec:Modules"
40360 \begin_layout Section
40364 \begin_layout Standard
40366 \begin_inset space ~
40370 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40372 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
40379 \begin_layout Section
40383 \begin_layout Standard
40384 The document font settings are described in section
40385 \begin_inset space ~
40389 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40391 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
40398 \begin_layout Section
40402 \begin_layout Standard
40403 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
40415 \begin_inset space ~
40420 and whether it should be a
40423 \begin_inset space ~
40428 can also be specified here.
40431 \begin_layout Standard
40432 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
40433 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
40434 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
40436 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
40439 \begin_layout Standard
40442 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
40445 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
40446 justifies the text on screen.
40447 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
40451 \begin_layout Section
40455 \begin_layout Standard
40456 This dialog is described in sections
40457 \begin_inset space ~
40461 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40463 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
40468 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40470 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
40477 \begin_layout Section
40481 \begin_layout Standard
40482 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
40483 \begin_inset space ~
40487 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40489 reference "subsec:Margins"
40496 \begin_layout Section
40498 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40500 name "sec:Language-encodings"
40505 \begin_inset Index idx
40508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40509 Language ! Encoding
40517 \begin_layout Standard
40518 The document language and quote styles are set here.
40519 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
40520 (the \SpecialChar LyX
40522 is always encoded in utf8).
40523 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
40524 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
40525 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
40526 -command is not known for
40527 a particular character).
40530 \begin_layout Standard
40531 If you use the option
40536 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
40537 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
40538 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40540 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
40541 exactly one encoding.
40542 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
40545 \begin_layout Standard
40547 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
40548 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
40549 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40550 installation supports Unicode), choose
40551 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
40552 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40553 is quite incomplete, so
40554 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
40559 (when \SpecialChar LyX
40560 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40561 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
40562 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40563 -commands is not used, because all
40564 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
40565 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
40566 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40567 , two new alternative engines
40568 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40570 Both engines support Unicode natively.
40572 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
40575 \begin_inset space ~
40583 \begin_inset space ~
40591 \begin_inset space ~
40597 \begin_inset space ~
40601 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40603 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
40608 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
40612 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
40615 \begin_layout Standard
40619 \begin_inset space ~
40624 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40625 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
40627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40635 The possible settings are:
40638 \begin_layout Description
40639 Default uses the language package that is selected in
40641 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40642 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40646 \begin_inset space ~
40650 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40652 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
40659 \begin_layout Description
40660 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
40661 format you will use.
40662 In many cases this will be
40667 \begin_inset Index idx
40670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40678 If the newer package
40683 \begin_inset Index idx
40686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40688 -packages ! polyglossia
40693 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
40694 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40695 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
40697 this package will be used instead of
40704 \begin_layout Description
40706 \begin_inset space ~
40717 would be more appropriate.
40720 \begin_layout Description
40721 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
40722 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
40726 (for German texts), type in
40729 \begin_inset Newline newline
40734 usepackage{ngerman}
40737 \begin_layout Description
40738 None will not use a language package.
40739 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
40742 \begin_layout Standard
40743 Here is a list with the important encodings:
40746 \begin_layout Description
40748 \begin_inset space ~
40752 \begin_inset space ~
40756 \begin_inset space ~
40763 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40769 \begin_inset Index idx
40772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40774 -packages ! inputenc
40780 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
40781 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
40782 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
40786 \begin_layout Description
40787 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
40789 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
40790 commands, which may result in a big
40791 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
40792 -commands are needed.
40795 \begin_layout Description
40797 \begin_inset space ~
40801 \begin_inset space ~
40804 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
40807 \begin_layout Description
40809 \begin_inset space ~
40813 \begin_inset space ~
40816 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
40819 \begin_layout Description
40821 \begin_inset space ~
40824 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
40827 \begin_layout Description
40829 \begin_inset space ~
40833 \begin_inset space ~
40836 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
40837 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
40840 \begin_layout Description
40842 \begin_inset space ~
40846 \begin_inset space ~
40849 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
40853 \begin_layout Description
40855 \begin_inset space ~
40859 \begin_inset space ~
40862 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
40863 ISO-8859-13 encoding
40866 \begin_layout Description
40868 \begin_inset space ~
40872 \begin_inset space ~
40876 \begin_inset space ~
40879 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
40880 \begin_inset space ~
40886 \begin_layout Description
40888 \begin_inset space ~
40892 \begin_inset space ~
40896 \begin_inset space ~
40899 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
40900 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
40903 \begin_layout Description
40905 \begin_inset space ~
40909 \begin_inset space ~
40912 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
40913 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
40914 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40915 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
40916 \begin_inset space ~
40920 \begin_inset space ~
40926 \begin_layout Description
40928 \begin_inset space ~
40932 \begin_inset space ~
40935 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
40936 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
40937 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40939 should try to use the encoding Unicode
40940 \begin_inset space ~
40944 \begin_inset space ~
40950 \begin_layout Description
40952 \begin_inset space ~
40956 \begin_inset space ~
40959 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
40962 \begin_layout Description
40964 \begin_inset space ~
40968 \begin_inset space ~
40971 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
40974 \begin_layout Description
40976 \begin_inset space ~
40980 \begin_inset space ~
40983 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
40986 \begin_layout Description
40988 \begin_inset space ~
40991 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
40994 \begin_layout Description
40996 \begin_inset space ~
40999 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
41002 \begin_layout Description
41004 \begin_inset space ~
41008 \begin_inset space ~
41011 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
41014 \begin_layout Description
41016 \begin_inset space ~
41020 \begin_inset space ~
41026 \begin_layout Description
41028 \begin_inset space ~
41032 \begin_inset space ~
41035 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
41038 \begin_layout Description
41040 \begin_inset space ~
41044 \begin_inset space ~
41050 \begin_layout Description
41052 \begin_inset space ~
41056 \begin_inset space ~
41059 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41065 \begin_inset Index idx
41068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41075 , when using this, set the document language to
41080 \begin_layout Description
41082 \begin_inset space ~
41086 \begin_inset space ~
41089 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41094 , when using this, set the document language to
41097 \begin_inset space ~
41103 \begin_layout Description
41105 \begin_inset space ~
41109 \begin_inset space ~
41112 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41118 \begin_inset Index idx
41121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41123 -packages ! japanese
41128 , when using this, set the document language to
41133 \begin_layout Description
41135 \begin_inset space ~
41139 \begin_inset space ~
41142 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41147 , when using this, set the document language to
41152 \begin_layout Description
41154 \begin_inset space ~
41158 \begin_inset space ~
41161 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41166 , when using this, set the document language to
41171 \begin_layout Description
41173 \begin_inset space ~
41176 (EUC-KR) for Korean
41179 \begin_layout Description
41181 \begin_inset space ~
41185 \begin_inset space ~
41189 \begin_inset space ~
41192 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
41195 \begin_layout Description
41197 \begin_inset space ~
41201 \begin_inset space ~
41205 \begin_inset space ~
41208 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
41209 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
41210 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
41213 \begin_layout Description
41215 \begin_inset space ~
41219 \begin_inset space ~
41225 \begin_layout Description
41227 \begin_inset space ~
41231 \begin_inset space ~
41234 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
41235 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
41238 \begin_layout Description
41240 \begin_inset space ~
41244 \begin_inset space ~
41247 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41253 \begin_inset Index idx
41256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41263 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
41266 \begin_layout Description
41268 \begin_inset space ~
41276 \begin_inset space ~
41279 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
41286 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41289 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41296 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41297 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41299 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
41302 \begin_layout Description
41304 \begin_inset space ~
41308 \begin_inset space ~
41311 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41317 \begin_inset Index idx
41320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41327 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
41330 \begin_layout Description
41332 \begin_inset space ~
41335 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41341 \begin_inset Index idx
41344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41346 -packages ! inputenc
41352 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
41356 \begin_layout Description
41358 \begin_inset space ~
41362 \begin_inset space ~
41366 \begin_inset space ~
41369 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
41370 \begin_inset space ~
41376 \begin_layout Description
41378 \begin_inset space ~
41382 \begin_inset space ~
41386 \begin_inset space ~
41389 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
41390 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
41391 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
41395 \begin_layout Description
41397 \begin_inset space ~
41401 \begin_inset space ~
41405 \begin_inset space ~
41408 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
41409 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
41412 \begin_layout Section
41414 \begin_inset Index idx
41417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41424 \begin_inset Index idx
41427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41434 \begin_inset Index idx
41437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41438 Color ! Shaded boxes
41444 \begin_inset Index idx
41447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41448 Color ! Greyed-out notes
41456 \begin_layout Standard
41457 Here you can alter the font color for the
41461 (default: black), for
41464 \begin_inset space ~
41469 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
41473 (default: white) and for
41476 \begin_inset space ~
41486 sets the color back to the default.
41489 \begin_layout Standard
41490 Clicking any button showing
41498 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
41499 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
41500 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
41501 later more quickly.
41504 \begin_layout Standard
41505 Note, if you change the
41508 \begin_inset space ~
41513 font color and use the option
41516 \begin_inset space ~
41521 in the document settings under
41524 \begin_inset space ~
41529 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
41530 \begin_inset space ~
41534 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41536 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41543 \begin_layout Standard
41544 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41550 \begin_layout Standard
41554 \begin_inset space ~
41563 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
41566 \begin_inset space ~
41569 Code after a forced page break:
41572 \begin_layout Itemize
41573 For the page color:
41574 \begin_inset Newline newline
41581 pagecolor{color name}
41584 \begin_layout Itemize
41585 For the text color:
41586 \begin_inset Newline newline
41596 \begin_layout Standard
41597 You are restricted to one of
41633 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
41640 \begin_inset space ~
41646 \begin_inset Newline newline
41649 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
41650 names to refer to them:
41653 \begin_layout Itemize
41659 \begin_inset Newline newline
41664 page_backgroundcolor
41667 \begin_layout Itemize
41671 \begin_inset space ~
41677 \begin_inset Newline newline
41685 \begin_layout Itemize
41689 \begin_inset space ~
41695 \begin_inset Newline newline
41703 \begin_layout Itemize
41707 \begin_inset space ~
41713 \begin_inset Newline newline
41721 \begin_layout Standard
41722 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
41725 \begin_inset space ~
41733 \begin_inset space ~
41741 \begin_layout Section
41745 \begin_layout Standard
41746 Here you can adjust the
41750 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
41754 as described in section
41755 \begin_inset space ~
41759 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41761 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
41768 \begin_layout Section
41772 \begin_layout Standard
41773 Here you can specify if a citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41779 \begin_inset Index idx
41782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41794 \begin_inset Index idx
41797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41799 -packages ! jurabib
41807 Sectioned bibliography
41809 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41815 \begin_inset Index idx
41818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41820 -packages ! bibtopic
41825 and you can select a
41829 for the generation of the bibliography.
41830 For a further description see section
41831 \begin_inset space ~
41835 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41837 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41844 \begin_layout Section
41848 \begin_layout Standard
41849 Here you can define the
41853 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
41855 \begin_inset space ~
41859 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41861 reference "sec:Index"
41868 \begin_layout Section
41872 \begin_layout Standard
41873 The PDF properties are explained in section
41874 \begin_inset space ~
41878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41880 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41887 \begin_layout Section
41891 \begin_layout Standard
41892 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
41893 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41899 \begin_inset Index idx
41902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41904 -packages ! amsmath
41914 \begin_inset Index idx
41917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41919 -packages ! amssymb
41929 \begin_inset Index idx
41932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41944 \begin_inset Index idx
41947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41959 \begin_inset Index idx
41962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41964 -packages ! mathdots
41974 \begin_inset Index idx
41977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41979 -packages ! mathtools
41989 \begin_inset Index idx
41992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42004 \begin_inset Index idx
42007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42009 -packages ! stackrel
42019 \begin_inset Index idx
42022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42024 -packages ! stmaryrd
42034 \begin_inset Index idx
42037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42039 -packages ! undertilde
42044 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
42047 \begin_layout Description
42048 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42049 -errors in formulas,
42050 ensure that you have this enabled.
42053 \begin_layout Description
42054 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
42055 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42056 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
42060 \begin_layout Description
42061 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
42064 \begin_inset space ~
42076 \begin_layout Description
42077 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
42080 \begin_inset space ~
42092 \begin_layout Description
42093 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
42104 \begin_layout Description
42105 mathtools is used for the math commands
42141 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
42148 \begin_layout Description
42149 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
42151 Chemical Symbols and Equations
42160 \begin_layout Description
42161 stackrel is used for the math command
42178 \begin_layout Description
42179 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
42182 \begin_layout Description
42183 undertilde is used for the math command
42191 Accents for one Character
42200 \begin_layout Section
42204 \begin_layout Standard
42205 The float placement options are described in the section
42208 \begin_inset space ~
42216 \begin_inset space ~
42224 \begin_layout Section
42228 \begin_layout Standard
42229 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
42231 Program Code Listings
42236 \begin_inset space ~
42244 \begin_layout Section
42248 \begin_layout Standard
42249 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
42257 set to be used and set the
42262 The itemize environment is described in section
42263 \begin_inset space ~
42267 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42269 reference "sec:Itemize"
42276 \begin_layout Standard
42277 You can furthermore specify a
42280 \begin_inset space ~
42285 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42286 command of the desired character.
42287 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
42294 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
42296 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42300 \begin_inset space \space{}
42304 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
42314 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
42315 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
42318 \begin_layout Standard
42319 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42327 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
42328 -packages in the preamble (menu
42331 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42332 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42335 \begin_inset space ~
42341 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
42345 usepackage{textcomp}
42348 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
42352 usepackage{amssymb}
42362 \begin_layout Section
42366 \begin_layout Standard
42367 Branches are described in section
42368 \begin_inset space ~
42372 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42374 reference "sec:Branches"
42381 \begin_layout Section
42383 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42385 name "sec:Doc-Output"
42392 \begin_layout Standard
42393 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
42396 \begin_layout Description
42398 \begin_inset space ~
42402 \begin_inset space ~
42405 Format: The format that is used when you enter
42406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42414 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42422 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42425 View Master Document
42426 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42430 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42433 Update Master Document
42434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42441 menu or the toolbar.
42442 The default is set in
42444 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42445 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42447 \begin_inset space ~
42450 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42454 \begin_inset space ~
42458 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42460 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42467 \begin_layout Description
42469 \begin_inset space ~
42473 \begin_inset space ~
42476 Output settings for the menu
42478 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42480 \begin_inset space ~
42486 For a detailed description see section
42488 Reverse DVI/PDF search
42493 \begin_inset space ~
42501 \begin_layout Description
42503 \begin_inset space ~
42507 \begin_inset space ~
42510 Options offers settings for the export format
42518 \begin_inset space ~
42523 will assure that the output follows exactly version
42524 \begin_inset space ~
42527 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
42531 \begin_inset space ~
42536 settings are described in detail in section
42538 Math Output in XHTML
42543 \begin_inset space ~
42552 \begin_inset space ~
42556 \begin_inset space ~
42561 is used for the size of equations in the output.
42564 \begin_layout Section
42572 \begin_layout Standard
42573 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
42575 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
42577 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42579 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
42583 \begin_layout Standard
42584 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42585 -syntax is given in section
42586 \begin_inset space ~
42590 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42592 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
42599 \begin_layout Chapter
42605 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42607 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42612 \begin_inset Index idx
42615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42624 \begin_layout Standard
42625 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
42627 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42631 It has the following submenus.
42634 \begin_layout Section
42638 \begin_layout Subsection
42642 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42643 User Interface File
42644 \begin_inset Index idx
42647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42648 Customization ! of toolbars
42654 \begin_inset Index idx
42657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42658 Customization ! of menus
42666 \begin_layout Standard
42667 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
42668 interface (ui) file.
42669 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
42677 \begin_layout Description
42682 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
42685 \begin_layout Description
42692 the menu entries in popup context menus
42695 \begin_layout Description
42700 specifies the toolbar buttons
42703 \begin_layout Standard
42704 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
42705 and edit the entries.
42708 \begin_layout Standard
42709 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
42721 entries must be finished with an explicit
42746 and in the case of the
42747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42759 The syntax for the entries is:
42762 \begin_layout Standard
42763 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42777 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42781 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42786 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42792 \begin_layout Standard
42794 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42797 All the \SpecialChar LyX
42798 -functions are listed in the menu
42800 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
42802 \begin_inset space ~
42810 \begin_layout Standard
42811 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
42817 \begin_layout Standard
42818 For example, assuming you use the menu
42820 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42823 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
42827 \begin_layout Standard
42828 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42834 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42838 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42842 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42846 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42852 \begin_layout Standard
42854 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42869 to have the sixth bookmark.
42872 \begin_layout Standard
42876 \begin_inset space ~
42881 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
42882 's toolbar buttons.
42883 The currently available icon sets are compared in
42884 \begin_inset CommandInset href
42887 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
42894 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42898 \begin_layout Standard
42901 Enable tool tips in main work area
42903 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
42907 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42911 \begin_layout Standard
42916 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
42917 should display in the menu
42919 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42921 \begin_inset space ~
42929 \begin_layout Subsection
42933 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42937 \begin_layout Standard
42940 Restore window layouts and geometries
42943 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
42944 the last \SpecialChar LyX
42948 \begin_layout Standard
42951 Restore cursor positions
42953 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
42957 \begin_layout Standard
42960 Load opened files from last session
42962 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
42966 \begin_layout Standard
42969 Clear all session information
42971 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
42972 sessions (cursor positions, names
42973 of last opened documents, etc.).
42976 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42978 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42980 name "subsec:Backup documents"
42985 \begin_inset Index idx
42988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42997 \begin_layout Standard
43000 Backup original documents when saving
43002 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
43003 it was saved the last time.
43004 It is stored in the
43007 \begin_inset space ~
43013 \begin_inset space ~
43017 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43019 reference "sec:Paths"
43023 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
43026 \begin_inset space ~
43032 The backup file has the file extension
43033 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43041 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43047 \begin_layout Standard
43050 Backup documents, every
43052 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
43055 \begin_layout Standard
43058 Save documents compressed by default
43060 always saves files in a compressed format.
43063 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43064 Windows & work area
43067 \begin_layout Standard
43070 Open documents in tabs
43072 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
43076 \begin_layout Standard
43081 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
43086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43088 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43092 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43094 reference "sec:Paths"
43098 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
43105 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
43106 documents will be opened in the same running instance
43107 of \SpecialChar LyX
43109 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
43110 instance is created for each file.
43113 \begin_layout Standard
43116 Single close-tab button
43118 is checked, there will only be one close button (
43121 \begin_inset Graphics
43122 filename ../images/closetab.png
43129 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
43130 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
43133 \begin_layout Standard
43134 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43142 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
43143 before the change takes effect.
43151 \begin_layout Standard
43156 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
43158 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
43160 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
43164 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
43165 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
43166 and only want to close the view in once instance.
43169 \begin_layout Subsection
43171 \begin_inset Index idx
43174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43181 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43183 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
43190 \begin_layout Standard
43191 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
43195 \begin_layout Standard
43196 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43204 This section only deals with the fonts
43208 the \SpecialChar LyX
43210 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
43213 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43214 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43225 \begin_layout Standard
43226 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
43243 (depends on the system) as its
43246 \begin_inset space ~
43262 \begin_layout Standard
43263 You can change the font size with the
43270 \begin_layout Standard
43275 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
43277 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43280 points have the size of 1
43281 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43285 \begin_inset space ~
43289 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43291 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
43296 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
43297 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43301 The sizes are explained in detail in section
43302 \begin_inset space ~
43306 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43308 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
43315 \begin_layout Standard
43318 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
43320 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
43321 needs to redraw the screen less often.
43322 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
43323 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
43324 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
43326 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
43327 \begin_inset space ~
43333 \begin_layout Subsection
43335 \begin_inset Index idx
43338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43339 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
43346 \begin_inset Index idx
43349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43358 \begin_layout Standard
43359 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
43360 by choosing an item in the
43361 list and selecting the
43368 \begin_layout Standard
43369 By checking the option
43373 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
43376 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
43377 \begin_inset space ~
43381 \begin_inset space ~
43386 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
43389 \begin_layout Subsection
43391 \begin_inset Index idx
43394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43403 \begin_layout Standard
43404 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
43408 \begin_layout Standard
43413 enables previewing snippets of your document.
43414 This feature is described in section
43415 \begin_inset space ~
43419 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43421 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
43428 \begin_layout Standard
43429 Checking the option
43432 \begin_inset space ~
43436 \begin_inset space ~
43440 \begin_inset space ~
43445 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
43448 \begin_layout Section
43450 \begin_inset Index idx
43453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43462 \begin_layout Subsection
43466 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43470 \begin_layout Standard
43473 Cursor follows scrollbar
43475 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
43479 \begin_layout Standard
43480 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
43481 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
43482 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
43485 \begin_layout Standard
43488 Scroll below end of document
43490 is self-explanatory.
43493 \begin_layout Standard
43494 In \SpecialChar LyX
43495 one can jump from word to word by pressing
43502 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
43504 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
43505 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
43508 \begin_layout Standard
43511 Sort environments alphabetically
43513 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43516 \begin_layout Standard
43519 Group environments by their category
43521 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43524 \begin_layout Standard
43529 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
43540 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43544 \begin_layout Standard
43545 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
43550 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
43551 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
43555 \begin_layout Subsection
43557 \begin_inset Index idx
43560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43567 \begin_inset Index idx
43570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43571 Settings ! Shortcuts
43579 \begin_layout Standard
43584 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
43586 Several binding files are available, among them:
43589 \begin_layout Description
43590 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
43593 \begin_layout Description
43594 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
43606 \begin_layout Description
43607 mac.bind a set of bindings for
43610 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43618 \begin_layout Standard
43619 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
43624 , and binding files for special languages.
43625 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
43626 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43630 \begin_inset space \space{}
43634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43638 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43642 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
43643 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
43644 will try to use the appropriate binding
43648 \begin_layout Standard
43649 Some binding files, like
43653 , only have a limited scope.
43654 When looking at the end of the file
43658 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
43661 \begin_layout Standard
43665 \begin_inset space ~
43669 \begin_inset space ~
43674 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
43675 in the selected key binding file.
43678 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43680 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43682 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
43687 \begin_inset Index idx
43690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43691 Key Bindings ! Editing
43699 \begin_layout Standard
43700 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
43701 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
43702 functions and the bound shortcuts.
43703 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
43706 Show key-bindings containing
43709 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
43710 Insert there for example as keyword
43711 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43718 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
43719 functions that contain
43720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43728 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
43729 All \SpecialChar LyX
43730 functions are also listed in the file
43735 that you will find in the
43742 \begin_layout Standard
43743 For example, to add the shortcut
43751 , select the function and press the
43756 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
43757 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
43760 \begin_layout Standard
43761 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
43762 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
43764 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
43765 function names as a semicolon separated list.
43767 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
43772 \begin_layout Standard
43773 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
43776 \begin_layout Standard
43777 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
43779 The syntax of the entries is:
43782 \begin_layout Standard
43788 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43792 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43796 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43801 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43807 \begin_layout Subsection
43809 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43811 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
43816 \begin_inset Index idx
43819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43826 \begin_inset Index idx
43829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43830 Settings ! Keyboard Map
43838 \begin_layout Standard
43839 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
43840 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
43841 provides keyboard maps.
43842 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
43843 is a Romanian one, you can enable
43846 \begin_inset space ~
43850 \begin_inset space ~
43855 and select the keyboard map file named
43862 \begin_layout Standard
43871 keyboard map and, if you use the
43875 bindings, you can select the first and second with
43878 arg "keymap-primary"
43884 arg "keymap-secondary"
43887 respectively or toggle between them with
43890 arg "keymap-toggle"
43896 \begin_layout Standard
43897 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43905 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
43914 \begin_layout Standard
43915 You can also specify the mouse
43917 Wheel scrolling speed
43920 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
43924 \begin_layout Standard
43932 \begin_inset space ~
43936 \begin_inset space ~
43941 you can select a key for zooming.
43942 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
43945 \begin_layout Subsection
43949 \begin_layout Standard
43950 Input completion is described in section
43951 \begin_inset space ~
43955 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43957 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
43964 \begin_layout Section
43966 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43973 \begin_inset Index idx
43976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43983 \begin_inset Index idx
43986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43995 \begin_layout Standard
43996 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
43997 are normally determined during
43999 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
44002 \begin_layout Description
44004 \begin_inset space ~
44007 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
44008 's working directory.
44009 It is the default when you
44020 \begin_inset space ~
44028 \begin_layout Description
44030 \begin_inset space ~
44033 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
44035 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44037 \begin_inset space ~
44041 \begin_inset space ~
44049 \begin_layout Description
44051 \begin_inset space ~
44054 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
44060 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44064 \begin_inset Newline newline
44068 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44080 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
44081 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
44089 \begin_layout Description
44091 \begin_inset space ~
44095 \begin_inset Index idx
44098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44104 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
44105 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
44106 \begin_inset space ~
44110 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44112 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44120 will be used to save the backups.
44121 \begin_inset Newline newline
44124 Backup files have the ending
44125 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44129 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44135 \begin_layout Description
44137 \begin_inset space ~
44140 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
44141 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
44143 \begin_inset Newline newline
44150 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44156 You can edit this file with the program
44165 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
44166 in its preferences under
44169 \begin_inset space ~
44175 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
44180 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
44182 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
44183 in your \SpecialChar LyX
44189 and \SpecialChar LyX
44190 need to be running the same time.
44191 \begin_inset Newline newline
44194 The pipe is also used for the
44199 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44203 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44205 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44210 \begin_inset Newline newline
44213 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
44214 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
44215 \begin_inset Newline newline
44231 \begin_layout Description
44233 \begin_inset space ~
44236 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
44239 \begin_layout Description
44241 \begin_inset space ~
44244 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
44245 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
44246 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
44249 \begin_layout Description
44251 \begin_inset space ~
44254 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
44260 You only need to specify it if you are using
44264 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
44266 For \SpecialChar LyX
44271 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
44275 \begin_layout Description
44277 \begin_inset space ~
44280 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
44281 When \SpecialChar LyX
44282 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
44283 to find it on the system.
44284 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
44286 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
44288 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44292 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44295 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
44296 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
44299 \begin_layout Description
44301 \begin_inset space ~
44304 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
44305 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
44306 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
44307 code or in the document
44309 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
44311 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
44312 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
44313 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
44314 scanned for the input files.
44315 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
44316 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
44318 It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise
44319 compilation may fail for some documents.
44322 \begin_layout Section
44326 \begin_layout Standard
44327 Here you can insert your
44336 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
44338 \begin_inset space ~
44342 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44344 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44348 , to mark changes you make as yours.
44351 \begin_layout Section
44353 \begin_inset Index idx
44356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44357 Language ! Settings
44363 \begin_inset Index idx
44366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44367 Settings ! Language
44375 \begin_layout Subsection
44377 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44379 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
44386 \begin_layout Description
44388 \begin_inset space ~
44392 \begin_inset space ~
44395 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
44397 You can find its actual translation status here:
44398 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44400 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
44407 \begin_layout Description
44409 \begin_inset space ~
44412 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
44413 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
44414 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
44415 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
44416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44428 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44432 The most widespread language package is
44437 \begin_inset Index idx
44440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44447 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
44449 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44450 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44451 come with the alternative
44457 \begin_inset Index idx
44460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44462 -packages ! polyglossia
44467 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
44468 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
44474 The available selections are described in section
44475 \begin_inset space ~
44479 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44481 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
44488 \begin_layout Description
44490 \begin_inset space ~
44493 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
44494 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
44495 you can here specify the command to start the package.
44496 An example is the start command
44502 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
44504 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
44508 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44523 selectlanguage{$$lang}
44528 \begin_layout Description
44530 \begin_inset space ~
44538 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
44539 command toggles the package on and off.
44542 \begin_layout Description
44544 \begin_inset space ~
44548 \begin_inset space ~
44551 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
44555 \begin_layout Description
44557 \begin_inset space ~
44561 \begin_inset space ~
44564 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
44568 \begin_layout Description
44570 \begin_inset space ~
44574 \begin_inset space ~
44577 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
44578 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
44579 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
44581 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
44588 \begin_layout Description
44590 \begin_inset space ~
44593 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
44595 When this option is not set, the
44598 \begin_inset space ~
44603 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44605 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
44608 \begin_inset space ~
44616 \begin_layout Description
44618 \begin_inset space ~
44624 \begin_inset space ~
44630 When it is not set, the
44633 \begin_inset space ~
44638 is set to the end of the document.
44641 \begin_layout Description
44643 \begin_inset space ~
44647 \begin_inset space ~
44650 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
44651 language will be underlined in blue.
44654 \begin_layout Description
44656 \begin_inset space ~
44660 \begin_inset space ~
44663 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
44664 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
44667 \begin_layout Description
44669 \begin_inset space ~
44672 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
44673 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
44674 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
44675 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
44678 \begin_layout Subsection
44682 \begin_layout Standard
44683 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
44684 \begin_inset space ~
44688 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44690 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
44697 \begin_layout Section
44701 \begin_layout Subsection
44705 \begin_layout Description
44707 \begin_inset space ~
44711 \begin_inset space ~
44714 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
44717 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44718 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
44720 \begin_inset space ~
44726 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
44729 \begin_layout Description
44731 \begin_inset space ~
44735 \begin_inset Index idx
44738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44745 \begin_inset Index idx
44748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44749 Settings ! Date format
44754 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
44755 \begin_inset Newline newline
44759 \begin_inset Flex URL
44762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44764 http://unixhelp.ed.ac.uk/CGI/man-cgi?date
44770 \begin_inset Newline newline
44773 For example the format
44774 \begin_inset Newline newline
44778 \begin_inset Newline newline
44781 prints the date as day/month/year.
44784 \begin_layout Description
44786 \begin_inset space ~
44790 \begin_inset space ~
44793 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
44794 is allowed to overwrite on export.
44797 \begin_layout Description
44799 \begin_inset space ~
44802 search Commands that will be used for the menu
44804 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
44806 \begin_inset space ~
44812 For a detailed description see section
44814 Reverse DVI/PDF search
44819 \begin_inset space ~
44827 \begin_layout Subsection
44833 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44835 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
44840 \begin_inset Index idx
44843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44844 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
44853 \begin_layout Description
44855 \begin_inset space ~
44863 \begin_inset space ~
44867 \begin_inset space ~
44870 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
44875 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
44896 are used for Cyrillic.
44897 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
44898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44910 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
44912 sets up in the background.
44913 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
44916 \begin_layout Description
44918 \begin_inset space ~
44922 \begin_inset space ~
44925 size This is the paper size that is used for new documents.
44930 value depends on your \SpecialChar LaTeX
44934 \begin_layout Description
44936 \begin_inset space ~
44940 \begin_inset space ~
44944 \begin_inset space ~
44948 \begin_inset space ~
44951 options They only have an effect when the program
44955 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
44958 \begin_layout Standard
44959 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
44960 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
44961 manuals of the applications.
44964 \begin_layout Description
44966 \begin_inset space ~
44969 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
44970 \begin_inset space ~
44974 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44976 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
44983 \begin_layout Description
44985 \begin_inset space ~
44988 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
44989 \begin_inset space ~
44993 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44995 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
45002 \begin_layout Description
45004 \begin_inset space ~
45007 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
45008 \begin_inset space ~
45012 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45014 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
45021 \begin_layout Description
45027 \begin_inset space ~
45030 command Command for the program
45032 Check\SpecialChar TeX
45035 that is described in the section
45037 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
45042 Additional Features
45047 \begin_layout Standard
45048 There are additionally the following options:
45051 \begin_layout Description
45053 \begin_inset space ~
45057 \begin_inset space ~
45061 \begin_inset space ~
45065 \begin_inset space ~
45070 \begin_inset space ~
45073 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
45074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45080 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45084 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45088 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45091 to separate folders.
45092 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
45094 \begin_inset Index idx
45097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45104 \begin_inset Index idx
45107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45116 \begin_layout Description
45118 \begin_inset space ~
45122 \begin_inset space ~
45126 \begin_inset space ~
45130 \begin_inset space ~
45134 \begin_inset space ~
45138 \begin_inset space ~
45141 changes Removes all manually set
45147 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45148 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45150 \begin_inset space ~
45155 dialog when changing the document class.
45158 \begin_layout Section
45160 \begin_inset space ~
45164 \begin_inset Index idx
45167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45176 \begin_layout Subsection
45178 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45180 name "subsec:Converters"
45185 \begin_inset Index idx
45188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45197 \begin_layout Standard
45198 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
45199 from one format to another.
45200 You can modify converters or create new ones.
45201 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
45208 \begin_inset space ~
45213 field and press the
45218 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
45222 \begin_inset space ~
45227 drop-down list, modify the
45231 field and press the
45238 \begin_layout Standard
45241 Converter File Cache
45247 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
45249 Maximum Age (in days
45252 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
45253 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
45256 \begin_layout Standard
45257 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
45258 definition, is described in the section
45269 \begin_layout Subsection
45271 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45273 name "sec:File-Formats"
45278 \begin_inset Index idx
45281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45288 \begin_inset Index idx
45291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45300 \begin_layout Standard
45301 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
45311 programs that should be used for certain formats.
45314 \begin_layout Standard
45315 You can also define the
45317 Default output format
45319 that is used when you use
45321 View, Update, View Master Document
45325 Update Master Document
45331 menu or the toolbar.
45334 \begin_layout Standard
45335 More about formats and their options is described in the section
45346 \begin_layout Standard
45347 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
45349 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
45350 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
45351 This is done by specifying a
45356 More about this is described in the section
45367 \begin_layout Chapter
45368 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45370 \begin_inset Index idx
45373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45380 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45382 name "chap:Units-available-in"
45389 \begin_layout Standard
45391 \begin_inset space ~
45395 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45397 reference "tab:Units"
45401 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45402 and used in this documentation.
45405 \begin_layout Standard
45406 \begin_inset Float table
45412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45413 \begin_inset Caption Standard
45415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45416 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45431 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45439 \begin_inset Tabular
45440 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="3">
45441 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
45442 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45443 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45444 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45577 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45581 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45614 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45618 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45650 scaled point (65536
45651 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45655 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45688 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45692 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45725 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45729 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
45733 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45766 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45770 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45802 % of original image width
45807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46084 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46088 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46118 \begin_layout Chapter
46120 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46122 name "chap:Credits"
46129 \begin_layout Standard
46130 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
46131 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
46134 \begin_layout Itemize
46137 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
46140 \begin_layout Itemize
46146 \begin_layout Itemize
46152 \begin_layout Itemize
46158 \begin_layout Itemize
46164 \begin_layout Itemize
46170 \begin_layout Itemize
46176 \begin_layout Itemize
46182 \begin_layout Itemize
46185 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
46188 \begin_layout Itemize
46194 \begin_layout Itemize
46200 \begin_layout Itemize
46206 \begin_layout Itemize
46212 \begin_layout Itemize
46218 \begin_layout Itemize
46224 \begin_layout Itemize
46230 \begin_layout Itemize
46236 \begin_layout Itemize
46237 The \SpecialChar LyX
46239 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
46248 \begin_layout Standard
46249 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46252 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
46259 \begin_layout Bibliography
46260 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46261 LatexCommand bibitem
46267 The \SpecialChar LyX
46269 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46272 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
46277 \begin_inset Newline newline
46281 \begin_inset Flex URL
46284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46286 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
46294 \begin_layout Bibliography
46295 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46296 LatexCommand bibitem
46297 key "latexcompanion"
46301 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
46303 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46304 Companion Second Edition.
46307 Addison-Wesley, 2004
46310 \begin_layout Bibliography
46311 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46312 LatexCommand bibitem
46317 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
46320 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
46324 Addison-Wesley, 2003
46327 \begin_layout Bibliography
46328 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46329 LatexCommand bibitem
46337 : A Document Preparation System.
46340 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
46343 \begin_layout Bibliography
46344 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46345 LatexCommand bibitem
46354 The \SpecialChar TeX
46358 Addison-Wesley, 1984
46361 \begin_layout Bibliography
46362 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46363 LatexCommand bibitem
46368 The \SpecialChar TeX
46370 \begin_inset Newline newline
46374 \begin_inset Flex URL
46377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46379 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
46387 \begin_layout Bibliography
46388 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46389 LatexCommand bibitem
46394 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46396 \begin_inset Newline newline
46400 \begin_inset Flex URL
46403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46405 http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html
46413 \begin_layout Bibliography
46414 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46415 LatexCommand bibitem
46421 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46423 name "Documentation"
46424 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
46430 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46434 \begin_inset Newline newline
46438 \begin_inset Flex URL
46441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46443 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
46451 \begin_layout Bibliography
46452 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46453 LatexCommand bibitem
46459 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46461 name "Documentation"
46462 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
46466 how to use the program
46468 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46472 \begin_inset Newline newline
46476 \begin_inset Flex URL
46479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46481 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
46489 \begin_layout Bibliography
46490 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46491 LatexCommand bibitem
46497 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46499 name "Documentation"
46500 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
46509 \begin_inset Newline newline
46513 \begin_inset Flex URL
46516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46518 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
46526 \begin_layout Bibliography
46527 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46528 LatexCommand bibitem
46534 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46536 name "Documentation"
46537 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
46546 \begin_inset Newline newline
46550 \begin_inset Flex URL
46553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46555 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
46563 \begin_layout Bibliography
46564 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46565 LatexCommand bibitem
46571 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46573 name "Documentation"
46574 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
46578 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
46580 \begin_inset Newline newline
46584 \begin_inset Flex URL
46587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46589 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
46597 \begin_layout Bibliography
46598 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46599 LatexCommand bibitem
46605 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46607 name "Documentation"
46608 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
46612 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46618 \begin_inset Index idx
46621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46623 -packages ! caption
46629 \begin_inset Newline newline
46633 \begin_inset Flex URL
46636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46638 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
46646 \begin_layout Bibliography
46647 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46648 LatexCommand bibitem
46654 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46656 name "Documentation"
46657 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
46661 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46667 \begin_inset Index idx
46670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46672 -packages ! enumitem
46678 \begin_inset Newline newline
46682 \begin_inset Flex URL
46685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46687 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
46695 \begin_layout Bibliography
46696 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46697 LatexCommand bibitem
46703 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46705 name "Documentation"
46706 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
46710 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46716 \begin_inset Index idx
46719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46721 -packages ! fancyhdr
46727 \begin_inset Newline newline
46731 \begin_inset Flex URL
46734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46736 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
46744 \begin_layout Bibliography
46745 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46746 LatexCommand bibitem
46752 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46754 name "Documentation"
46755 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
46759 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46765 \begin_inset Index idx
46768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46770 -packages ! hyperref
46776 \begin_inset Newline newline
46780 \begin_inset Flex URL
46783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46785 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
46793 \begin_layout Bibliography
46794 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46795 LatexCommand bibitem
46801 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46803 name "Documentation"
46804 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
46808 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46814 \begin_inset Index idx
46817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46819 -packages ! nomencl
46825 \begin_inset Newline newline
46829 \begin_inset Flex URL
46832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46834 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
46842 \begin_layout Bibliography
46843 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46844 LatexCommand bibitem
46850 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46852 name "Documentation"
46853 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
46857 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46863 \begin_inset Index idx
46866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46868 -packages ! prettyref
46874 \begin_inset Newline newline
46878 \begin_inset Flex URL
46881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46883 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
46891 \begin_layout Bibliography
46892 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46893 LatexCommand bibitem
46899 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46901 name "Documentation"
46902 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
46906 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46912 \begin_inset Index idx
46915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46917 -packages ! refstyle
46923 \begin_inset Newline newline
46927 \begin_inset Flex URL
46930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46932 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
46940 \begin_layout Bibliography
46941 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46942 LatexCommand bibitem
46948 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46951 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
46955 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
46957 \begin_inset Newline newline
46961 \begin_inset Flex URL
46964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46966 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
46974 \begin_layout Bibliography
46975 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46976 LatexCommand bibitem
46982 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46985 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
46989 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
46991 \begin_inset Newline newline
46995 \begin_inset Flex URL
46998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47000 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
47008 \begin_layout Bibliography
47009 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47010 LatexCommand bibitem
47016 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47019 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
47023 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47024 for Cyrillic languages:
47025 \begin_inset Newline newline
47029 \begin_inset Flex URL
47032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47034 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
47042 \begin_layout Bibliography
47043 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47044 LatexCommand bibitem
47050 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47053 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
47057 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47059 \begin_inset Newline newline
47063 \begin_inset Flex URL
47066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47068 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
47076 \begin_layout Bibliography
47077 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47078 LatexCommand bibitem
47084 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47087 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
47091 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47093 \begin_inset Newline newline
47097 \begin_inset Flex URL
47100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47102 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
47110 \begin_layout Bibliography
47111 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47112 LatexCommand bibitem
47118 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47121 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
47125 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47127 \begin_inset Newline newline
47131 \begin_inset Flex URL
47134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47136 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
47144 \begin_layout Bibliography
47145 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47146 LatexCommand bibitem
47152 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47155 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
47159 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47161 \begin_inset Newline newline
47165 \begin_inset Flex URL
47168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47170 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
47178 \begin_layout Bibliography
47179 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47180 LatexCommand bibitem
47186 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47189 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
47193 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47195 \begin_inset Newline newline
47199 \begin_inset Flex URL
47202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47204 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
47212 \begin_layout Bibliography
47213 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47214 LatexCommand bibitem
47220 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47223 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
47227 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47229 \begin_inset Newline newline
47233 \begin_inset Flex URL
47236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47238 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
47246 \begin_layout Bibliography
47247 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47248 LatexCommand bibitem
47254 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47257 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
47261 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47263 \begin_inset Newline newline
47267 \begin_inset Flex URL
47270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47272 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
47280 \begin_layout Bibliography
47281 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47282 LatexCommand bibitem
47288 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47291 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
47295 about new features in
47301 \begin_inset Newline newline
47305 \begin_inset Flex URL
47308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47310 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
47318 \begin_layout Standard
47319 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
47326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47353 \begin_inset Note Note
47356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47363 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
47364 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
47365 bibliography is the second one:
47373 \begin_layout Standard
47374 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
47375 LatexCommand bibtex
47376 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
47377 options "biblio/alphadin"
47384 \begin_layout Standard
47385 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47389 \begin_layout Standard
47390 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
47391 LatexCommand printnomenclature
47397 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
47398 LatexCommand printindex